ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300

with HART
©
Communications Option
(HART
©
5 and HART
©
6 Versions)
User Manual
Doc. No.: 34-ST-25-17
Revision Date: February 2012





Honeywell Process Solutions
Notices and Trademarks
ii ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012

Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2011 by Honeywell Inc.
February 2012

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may
be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and
specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell is a U.S. registered trademarks Of Honeywell Inc.
"HART
©
is a registered trademark of the HART
©
Communications Foundation"
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.





Honeywell Process Solutions
1860 West Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, Arizona 85027





Patent Notice
This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 4,520,488; 4,567,466; 4,494,183;
4,502,335; 4,592,002; 4,553,104; 4,541,282; 4,806,905; 4,797,669; 4,735,090; 4,768,382; 4,787,250;
4,888,992; 5,811,690; 5,875,150; 5,765,436; 4,734,873; 6,041,659 and other patents pending.
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
About This Document
Contact Info
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our industrial automation and
control customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL/e-mail)
Corporate http://www.honeywell.com
Honeywell Field Solutions www.honeywellprocess.com
Technical Assistance Center ask-ssc@honeywell.com (e-mail)

Contact Information
For Europe, Asia Pasific, North and South America contact details see back page .
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.

Location Organization Phone Number
United States and Canada

For Outside United States
Technical Assistance Center
Customer Services
Technical Assistance Center
1-800-423-9883
1-800-343-0228
001-215/641-3610

Release Information


Document Name
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 with HART
©

Communications Option
Document ID Publication Date
Part number changes 34-ST-25-17 February 2012

References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this
publication.

Document Number Document Title
34-ST-25-14 ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter User’s Manual
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
iii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, check to see how your transmitter is
currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application.
If the problem persists, you can reach Honeywell’s Solution Support Center for technical support by
telephone during normal business hours. An engineer will discuss your problem with you. Please have your
complete model number, serial number, and software revision number on hand for reference. You can find
the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates. You may also seek additional help by
contacting the Honeywell distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter.


Problem Resolution
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement transmitter or part will be shipped with
instructions for returning the defective unit. Please do not return your transmitter without authorization
from Honeywell’s Solution Support Center or until the replacement has been received.

Symbol definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition





This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.




This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.




WARNING: risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock
hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60
VDC may be accessible.




ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices




Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.



Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 iv
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Contents

Patent Notice.............................................................................................................. ii
Problem Resolution......................................................................................................................... iv
Before You Begin, Please Note........................................................................................................ xvi
Transmitter Terminal Blocks ......................................................................................................... xvi
Preface....................................................................................................................xvii
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only .................................................................... 1
Overview..............................................................................................................................................1
About this section.............................................................................................................................1
Section contents ..............................................................................................................................1
Glossary of terms and abbreviations: ..............................................................................................1
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters ...............................................................................................................2
About the transmitter........................................................................................................................2
Functional block diagram.................................................................................................................3
Series and model number data........................................................................................................4
ST 3000 transmitter family...............................................................................................................5
HART
©
Communicator ........................................................................................................................7
Transmitter adjustments ..................................................................................................................7
Transmitter operator interface .........................................................................................................7
HART
©
5 or HART
©
6? ....................................................................................................................7
The HART
©
Communicator Purpose ...............................................................................................7
Transmitter Order ................................................................................................................................8
Order components ...........................................................................................................................8
About documentation.......................................................................................................................8
Local Smart Meter Option ...................................................................................................................9
Smart meter assembly.....................................................................................................................9
Option availability...........................................................................................................................10
2— Quick Start Reference ....................................................................................... 11
Overview............................................................................................................................................11
About this section...........................................................................................................................11
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly ..................................................................................12
Quick start-up tasks .......................................................................................................................12
3— Preinstallation Considerations ........................................................................... 13
Overview............................................................................................................................................13
About this section...........................................................................................................................13
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) ................................................................................................................13
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice.........................................................................................................13
About conformity and special conditions .......................................................................................13
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
v
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter ...........................................................................................14
Evaluate conditions........................................................................................................................14
Temperature limits .........................................................................................................................14
Pressure ratings.............................................................................................................................16
Considerations for HART
©
communicator.........................................................................................16
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................16
Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option...................................................................................16
4— Installation ......................................................................................................... 17
Overview............................................................................................................................................17
About this section...........................................................................................................................17
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter..........................................................................................................17
Summary........................................................................................................................................17
Dimensions ....................................................................................................................................17
Bracket mounting...........................................................................................................................18
Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans .................................20
Flange mounting ............................................................................................................................23
Flush mounting ..............................................................................................................................24
High Temperature Transmitter Mounting.......................................................................................26
Remote seal mounting...................................................................................................................28
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter...............................................................................................................30
Piping Arrangements .....................................................................................................................30
Transmitter location .......................................................................................................................31
Process connections......................................................................................................................32
Flange descriptions........................................................................................................................33
General piping guidelines ..............................................................................................................33
Installing flange adapter.................................................................................................................34
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter ..............................................................................................................35
Summary........................................................................................................................................35
Wiring connections.........................................................................................................................36
Approval body requirements..........................................................................................................37
Lightning protection........................................................................................................................38
Process Sealing.............................................................................................................................38
Explosionproof Conduit seal ..........................................................................................................38
Output meter options .....................................................................................................................39
5— Getting Started................................................................................................... 41
Overview............................................................................................................................................41
About this section...........................................................................................................................41
Establishing Communications ...........................................................................................................41
Software compatibility....................................................................................................................41
Upgrading HART
©
communicator software ...................................................................................42
Connecting the communicator .......................................................................................................43
Starting communications................................................................................................................44
Making Initial Checks.........................................................................................................................45
Checking configuration data ..........................................................................................................45
Transmitter write protection option ................................................................................................46
Failure mode (Failsafe) alarm jumper............................................................................................46
Local smart meter display indications............................................................................................47
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 vi
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
6— Configuration ..................................................................................................... 48
Overview............................................................................................................................................48
About this section...........................................................................................................................48
Section contents ............................................................................................................................48
Configuration Overview.....................................................................................................................49
About configuration........................................................................................................................49
Communicator and ST 3000 transmitter memories.......................................................................49
Copying transmitter configuration into nonvolatile memory...........................................................50
What to configure...........................................................................................................................51
Interface menus .............................................................................................................................52
Model 275 Communicator..............................................................................................................58
Model 275 Interface characteristics...............................................................................................59
Symbols .........................................................................................................................................59
Model 375 Communicator..............................................................................................................60
Model 375 Interface characteristics...............................................................................................61
Making changes with 275 Communicator......................................................................................62
Making changes with Model 375 Communicator...........................................................................63
Tag— Entering a Tag Number ..........................................................................................................64
PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement .........................................................................65
Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV.................................................................................66
Procedure for keying in LRV and URV..........................................................................................66
Procedure for setting range values to applied pressure................................................................67
Device Information.............................................................................................................................68
Output form options .......................................................................................................................70
About square root output ...............................................................................................................70
Square root dropout .......................................................................................................................71
PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time...........................................................................................72
SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units ................................................................................73
Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address....................................................................................................74
Install Date – Enter Install Date.........................................................................................................75
Disconnecting the Communicator .....................................................................................................75
Disconnection checklist..................................................................................................................75
7— Start-up.............................................................................................................. 76
Overview............................................................................................................................................76
About this section...........................................................................................................................76
Start-up Tasks ...................................................................................................................................77
About start-up ................................................................................................................................77
Procedure reference ......................................................................................................................77
Running Analog Output .....................................................................................................................78
Background....................................................................................................................................78
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................78
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter ...........................................................................................80
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................80
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter ....................................................................................82
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................82
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
vii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank........................................................................................85
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................85
Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank................................................................................87
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................87
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter............................................................90
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................90
Pressure Measurement with AP........................................................................................................93
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................93
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals ................................................96
Procedure ......................................................................................................................................96
8— Operation......................................................................................................... 101
Introduction......................................................................................................................................101
About this section.........................................................................................................................101
Accessing Operation Data...............................................................................................................101
Summary......................................................................................................................................101
Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers....................................................105
Default failsafe direction...............................................................................................................105
Write protect option......................................................................................................................105
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................105
Writing Data in the Message Area...................................................................................................108
Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database............................................................................109
Background..................................................................................................................................109
Procedures...................................................................................................................................110
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release....................................................... 112
Introduction......................................................................................................................................112
About this section.........................................................................................................................112
Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics..................................................................................112
Power Up Diagnostics..................................................................................................................112
Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics ...........................................................................113
Operating Voltage Diagnostics ....................................................................................................115
PV Tracking Diagnostics..............................................................................................................116
Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics ..........................................................................118
Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics..........................................................................................119
Calibration Records.........................................................................................................................120
Zero Trim Records.......................................................................................................................120
Correct LRV Records...................................................................................................................121
Correct URV Records ..................................................................................................................121
Process Variables Parameters........................................................................................................122
Electronics Temperature..............................................................................................................122
Static Pressure.............................................................................................................................122
Basic Setup – Device Info ...............................................................................................................123
Install Date...................................................................................................................................123
Model Number .............................................................................................................................123
Materials of Construction.............................................................................................................123
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 viii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Review Parameters .........................................................................................................................124
Install Date...................................................................................................................................124
Power fail count ...........................................................................................................................124
Electronics Temperature..............................................................................................................124
% Service Life in Stress...............................................................................................................125
% Service Life Used.....................................................................................................................125
Static Pressure.............................................................................................................................126
10— Maintenance .................................................................................................. 127
Introduction......................................................................................................................................127
About this section.........................................................................................................................127
Preventive Maintenance..................................................................................................................127
Maintenance routines and schedules ..........................................................................................127
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms .................................................................................127
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................127
Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA).....................................................................................130
About the PWA Electronics Board...............................................................................................130
Replacing Meter Body .....................................................................................................................133
11— Calibration ..................................................................................................... 137
Introduction......................................................................................................................................137
About this section.........................................................................................................................137
Overview..........................................................................................................................................137
About calibration ..........................................................................................................................137
Calibrating Analog Output Signal ....................................................................................................138
Calibrating Range............................................................................................................................139
Resetting Calibration .......................................................................................................................142
Background..................................................................................................................................142
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................142
12 - Diag/Service – Advanced Diagnostics ............................................................ 143
Introduction......................................................................................................................................143
About this section.........................................................................................................................143
Overview..........................................................................................................................................143
About Advanced Diagnostics.......................................................................................................143
13— Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 145
Introduction......................................................................................................................................145
About this section.........................................................................................................................145
Troubleshooting Overview...............................................................................................................145
Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................145
Troubleshooting tool ....................................................................................................................145
To access transmitter diagnostics...................................................................................................145
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
ix
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Diagnostic Messages ......................................................................................................................146
Summary......................................................................................................................................146
Critical failures .............................................................................................................................146
Non-critical failures ......................................................................................................................147
Communication errors..................................................................................................................148
Interpreting Messages.....................................................................................................................149
Clearing Critical Status....................................................................................................................151
14— Parts List........................................................................................................ 152
Replacement Parts..........................................................................................................................152
About this section.........................................................................................................................152
14— Reference Drawings ...................................................................................... 173
Wiring Diagrams..............................................................................................................................173
Contents.......................................................................................................................................173
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference ................................................................... 175
Introduction......................................................................................................................................175
About this section.........................................................................................................................175
Smart meter option ......................................................................................................................176
Smart Meter Set up......................................................................................................................176
Smart Meter Display........................................................................................................................177
Display description.......................................................................................................................177
Smart Meter Specifications .............................................................................................................179
Operating conditions and specifications ......................................................................................179
Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes..............................................................179
Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span).................................................................................180
Local zero and span option..........................................................................................................180
About local adjustments...............................................................................................................180
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons..................................................................................183
Using the Smart Meter .................................................................................................................183
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration..................................................184
Selecting Engineering Units.........................................................................................................185
Setting Lower and Upper Display Values ....................................................................................187
Setting Lower Display Values......................................................................................................188
Setting Upper Display Values......................................................................................................191
Setting smart meter display using the HART
©
communicator.........................................................196
Using the Hart Communicator to Configure the Smart Meter Display.........................................196
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration..................................................196
Typical smart meter indications.......................................................................................................199
Operation error codes......................................................................................................................200
Meter/transmitter interaction............................................................................................................201
Transmitter power cycling............................................................................................................201
Changing output conformity.........................................................................................................201
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 x
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet ............................................................ 203
ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter with HART
©
Communications ...................................................203
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters.................................................... 205
Problem........................................................................................................................................205
Possible Solutions/Methods ............................................................................................................205
Solution........................................................................................................................................205
Sealing liquid method...................................................................................................................205
Purging.........................................................................................................................................207
Gas applications ..........................................................................................................................207
Mechanical (diaphragm) seals.....................................................................................................207
Electric heating ............................................................................................................................209
Steam heating..............................................................................................................................210
Superheated steam considerations .............................................................................................213
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications ...................................................... 215
Introduction......................................................................................................................................215
Reference information..................................................................................................................215
North American Hazardous Location Standards.............................................................................215
NEC and CEC electrical codes....................................................................................................215
Classes ........................................................................................................................................215
Divisions.......................................................................................................................................215
Examples .....................................................................................................................................215
Group classifications....................................................................................................................216
Methods of protection ..................................................................................................................216
Temperature classification...........................................................................................................217
Intrinsically safe apparatus parameters.......................................................................................217
Associated apparatus parameters...............................................................................................218
Entity concept ..............................................................................................................................218
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications....................................................220
IEC Classification of hazardous locations....................................................................................220
Zones ...........................................................................................................................................220
Groups .........................................................................................................................................220
Methods of protection ..................................................................................................................221
Temperature classification...........................................................................................................221
Certification and conformity details..............................................................................................222
Enclosure Ratings ...........................................................................................................................224
NEMA and IEC Recognition ........................................................................................................224
IEC Classifications.......................................................................................................................224
IEC Designations .........................................................................................................................224
NEMA Standards .........................................................................................................................224
Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2,
Explosionproof Electrical Systems ..................................................................................................225
ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters .......................................................................................225
Index ...................................................................................................................... 227

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xi
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Tables



Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family ..............................................................................................................5
Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options ............................................................................................................................10
Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference................................................................................................................................12
Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200) .............................................15
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings........................................................16
Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket ..................................................................................................18
Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span ......................................21
Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation .............................................................................................................24
Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter.............................................................................................28
Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes ..................................................................................31
Table 11 Process Connections.....................................................................................................................................32
Table 12 Flange Description........................................................................................................................................33
Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter .............................................................................................................................34
Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter .................................................................................................................................37
Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter..................................................................................................44
Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters .......................................................................................45
Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters ......................................................................51
Table 18 Entering Tag Number ...................................................................................................................................64
Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units .........................................................................................................................65
Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV.............................................................................................................................66
Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures................................................................................................67
Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data.................................................................................................68
Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity........................................................................................................................70
Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time .............................................................................................................................72
Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units ..................................................................................................................73
Table 26 Selecting Poll Address..................................................................................................................................74
Table 27 Entering Installation Date.............................................................................................................................75
Table 28 Start-up Procedure Reference.......................................................................................................................77
Table 29 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode ...................................................................78
Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement.....................................................................................80
Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement ...............................................................................83
Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank...............................................85
Table 33 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank........................................88
Table 34 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement .....................................................91
Table 35 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement. ..............................................................................95
Table 36 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement .........................................96
Table 37 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access .................................................................................. 102
Table 38 Changing Default Failsafe Direction.......................................................................................................... 106
Table 39 Changing Write Protect Jumper.................................................................................................................. 107
Table 40 Writing Data in the Message Area.............................................................................................................. 108
Table 41 Saving a Configuration Database ............................................................................................................... 110
Table 42 Downloading a Configuration Database..................................................................................................... 111
Table 43 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms............................................................................................. 128
Table 44 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings ............................................................................................................. 130
Table 45 Replacing PWA.......................................................................................................................................... 130
Table 46 Replacing Meter Body Only....................................................................................................................... 133
Table 47 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode....................................................................... 138
Table 48 Calibrating Measurement Range – Correct LRV........................................................................................ 139
Table 49 Calibrating Measurement Range – Correct URV....................................................................................... 140
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 xii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Table 51 View Diagnostics........................................................................................................................................ 143
Table 52 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures ............................................................................. 146
Table 53 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures ..................................................................... 147
Table 54 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status...................................................................................... 147
Table 55 Other Error Messages ................................................................................................................................. 147
Table 56 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors................................................................... 148
Table 57 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table ................................................................................................... 149
Table 58 Resetting the Transmitter............................................................................................................................ 151
Table 59 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.................................................................................... 154
Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43 ...................................................................... 156
Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45. ..................................................................... 157
Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45 ...................................................................... 160
Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46. ............................................................................................ 162
Table 64 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body ........................... 163
Table 65 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47. ............................................................................................ 164
Table 66 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48. ............................................................................................ 165
Table 67 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49. ............................................................................................ 166
Table 68 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50. ............................................................................................ 168
Table 69 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51. ............................................................................................ 169
Table 70 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts. ................................................................................................... 171
Table 71 External Wiring Diagrams.......................................................................................................................... 173
Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators........................................................................................ 177
Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description.................................................................................................................. 178
Table A-3 Smart meter specifications. ...................................................................................................................... 179
Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments.............................................................. 180
Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code ...................................................................................................... 184
Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units ..................................................................................................................... 185
Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display.......................................................................... 188
Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display............................................................................ 191
Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART
©
communicator ......................................................................... 197
Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications. ...................................................................................... 199
Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions............................................................................................ 200
Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems ................................................................................... 212
Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values ................................................................................. 213
Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC) ................................................................................... 217
Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters............................................................................................................................... 219
Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC).............................................................................................. 221
Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification .................................. 224

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xiii
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Figures


Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.........................................................................................2
Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation. ....................................................3
Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface...................................................................................................................7
Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components. ..........................................................................................8
Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option. .......................................................................................................9
Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation.........................................................................14
Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations........................................................................18
Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters ...................................................................................................................................21
Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation.........................................................................................24
Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation.........................................................................................25
Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations ..........................................................................................27
Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation. .........................................................................29
Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement. .............................................................30
Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection...................................................................31
Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters. ...............................................................................................35
Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................36
Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection..............................................................................................38
Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections...........................................................................................................43
Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location ..........................................................................46
Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit...............................................................................................47
Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process.............................................................................................................49
Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories...................................................................................50
Figure 23 HART
©
5 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary...........................................................................................53
Figure 23a HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary...........................................................................................54
Figure 24 HART
©
6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary...........................................................................................54
Figure 25 HART
©
5 275 or 375 Communicator Menu Summary ...............................................................................56
Figure 26 HART
©
6 375 Communicator Menu Summary ..........................................................................................57
Figure 27 Model 275 HART
©
Communicator.............................................................................................................58
Figure 28 Model 375 HART
©
Communicator.............................................................................................................60
Figure 29 Square Root Dropout Point .........................................................................................................................71
Figure 30 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode..................79
Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter .......................................80
Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter..................................82
Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank85
Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized
Tank. 87
Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter..................................90
Figure 36 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type Transmitter...........................91
Figure 37 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter..................................94
Figure 38 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote
Seals. 96
Figure 39 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA......................................................................... 106
Figure 40 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function.................................................................................... 109
Figure 41 GP/AP Process Head................................................................................................................................. 128
Figure 42 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body............................................................ 129
Figure 43 Typical Range Calibration Hookup........................................................................................................... 141
Figure 44 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ................................................................................. 153
Figure 45 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ................................................................................. 154

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 xiv
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
Figure 46 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End................................................................... 155
Figure 47 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End...................................................................... 155
Figure 48 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD904, STD924, STD930, STD974,
STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater)................................................................................................................. 157
Figure 49 ST 3000 Model STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater) ............................................................................. 160
Figure 50 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body ...................................................... 162
Figure 51 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies. .................................................................................................. 164
Figure 52 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body. ................................................................................... 165
Figure 53 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body......................................................................................................... 166
Figure 54 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body. ......................................................................... 167
Figure 55 High Temperature Meter Body. ................................................................................................................ 169
Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit........................................................................................... 177
Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments................................ 183
Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid. .................. 206
Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid. .................... 206
Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow.............................................................................................................. 207
Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals. ........................ 208
Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal................................. 208
Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and
Control. .............................................................................................................................................................. 209
Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control.210
Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. ....... 211
Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. ............. 212



February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xv
Patent Notice - Before You Begin, Please Note
IMPORTANT
Before You Begin, Please Note
Transmitter Terminal Blocks
Depending on your transmitter options, the transmitter may be equipped with either a 3-screw or 5-screw
terminal block inside the electronics housing. This may affect how to connect the loop wiring and meter
wiring to the transmitter. See Table 14 in Section 4 for the terminal block connections for each type
terminal. Section 13 provides additional wiring diagrams showing alternate wiring methods.

-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
Terminal
Block
Electronics
Housing
Internal
Ground
Terminal


3-Screw Terminal Block
+
+
-
-
L-
S
I
G
N
A
L
M
E
T
E
R
T
E
S
T
S
I
G
N
A
L
-
+
+
-
Terminal
Block
Electronics
Housing
Internal
Ground
Terminal


5-Screw Terminal Block


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 xvi
Preface - Before You Begin, Please Note

Preface
This preface is included for informational purposes only.
The latest release of the ST 3000 HART
©

6 Device is known as the “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” with the following Version
information:
Universal rev: 6
Field device rev: 5
Software rev: 36
This release will include the Advanced Diagnostics for the ST 3000 HART
©
6 device.
The advanced diagnostics features will help our customers to:
- Reduce maintenance costs.
- Know when maintenance is needed.
- Know when maintenance was performed.
- Know how hard a life the device has had.
- Know what to order when a replacement is needed.
There are, in existence, software packages available at the systems level that perform some of these
functions but these packages take a lot of effort to set-up and maintain and largely go unused. The
advanced diagnostics for the ST 3000 pressure transmitter should be able to provide some of this
needed functionality without a lot of user effort.
Listed below are the available Diagnostics in the ST 3000 Transmitter:
- Installation Date
- Time in Service
- Power Cycles
- Last Power Up Time and Date
- Terminal Voltage
- Minimum Terminal Voltage
- Minimum Terminal Voltage Date
- Status bit indicates less than 10V at terminals
- Electronics Temperature Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)
- Meter Body Temperature Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)
- Process Variable Tracking: (Min/Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)
- Static Pressure Tracking: (Max, timestamp and duration for exceeding limits)
- Model Number
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xvii
-
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 xviii
- Materials of Construction
- Stress Monitor
- Service Life Expended
- Calibration Time and Date
- Zero Trim Time and Date
NOTE 1: The features listed above are not available in earlier versions of ST 3000 HART
©
6 devices or
any of the HART
©
5 Devices.
NOTE 2: Complete list of Advanced Diagnostics with the details is under the section : “Advanced
Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release”.





1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Overview
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only
Overview
About this section
This section is intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 Smart Transmitter with
HART
©
communications. It provides some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000
transmitter and the HART
©
communications interface.
Section contents
This section includes these topics:
- ST 3000 Smart Transmitters – Brief description of the ST 3000 transmitter form, functions and
identification.
- HART
©
Communicator – Brief description of the communication interface used with the ST 3000
HART
©
transmitter.
- Transmitter order – Describes the components shipped with a transmitter order.
- Local Smart Meter Option – Describes the smart meter options available with the transmitter.
Glossary of terms and abbreviations:
ET Electronics Temperature – temperature inside of the electronics housing.
MBT Meter Body Temperature – same as SV or process temperature.
SV Secondary Variable – value is the same as process temperature or meter body temperature.
It is the temperature measured at the pressure sensor.
DP Differential Pressure.
AP Absolute Pressure.
GP Gauge Pressure.
SP Static Pressure same as the pressure on high side.
URV Upper Range Value as selected by end user.
LRV Lower Range Value as selected by end user.
UTL Upper Transducer Limit - Defines the highest acceptable value for the Transducer.
UTL = 2*URL (Units same as PV) for DP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
UTL = 1.5*URL (Units same as PV) for AP and GP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
LTL Lower Transducer Limit - Defines the lowest acceptable value for the Transducer.
LTL = -2*URL (Unit same as PV) for DP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
LTL = 0 (Units same as PV) for AP and GP where SPAN cannot be greater than UTL
URL Upper Sensor Range Limit – Defines the maximum recommended value for the URV.
LRL Lower Sensor Range Limit – Defines the minimum recommended value for the LRV.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
1
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
About the transmitter
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one
of these basic types of pressure:
- Differential Pressure
- Gauge Pressure
- Absolute Pressure
The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output signal proportional to the measured
variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere, two-wire loop. Its major components are an electronics housing and a
meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure model transmitter.

Electronics
Housing
Meter Body


Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 2
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
Functional block diagram
Besides the process variable (PV) output, the transmitter also provides its meter body temperature as a
secondary variable (SV) which is only available as a read-only parameter through the communicator
interface. See Figure 2.

A/D
DP or PP
Sensor
Temperature
Sensor
Static Pressure
Sensor
Meter Body
El ectroni cs Housi ng
Pressure
Factory
Characteri zation
Data
Modular Electronics Terminal Block
Proportional 4 to
20 mA PV output.
(Digital signal
imposed during
HART interface
communications)
D/A
PROM
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
x
e
r
Microprocessor
Digital I/O


Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
3
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
Series and model number data
Honeywell’s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two series designations:

- Series 100 - Series 900

Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface
requirements. Each transmitter comes with a nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that
lists its given “model number”. The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table
selections as shown below.

Key Number
M
e
t
e
r

B
o
d
y
F
l
a
n
g
e

A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
O
p
t
i
o
n
s
F
a
c
t
o
r
y

I
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Table I Table II Table III Table IV
B
a
s
i
c

T
y
p
e
, S T D 1 2 0 E 1 H 0 0 0 0 0 S 1 C B
X X X X


You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits
in the key number. The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types:
A = Absolute Pressure
D = Differential Pressure
F = Flange Mounted
G = Gauge Pressure
R = Remote Seals
The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series. Thus, a “1” means the
transmitter is a Series 100 and a “9” is a Series 900.
For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model number, please refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document.



ATTENTION
Be aware that previous vintages of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100,
Series 100e, Series 600, and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the
ST 3000 was introduced in 1983. While all these transmitters are functionally alike, there are
differences in housing and electronics design.
This manual only applies for Series 100, Release 300 and Series 900, Release 300
transmitters furnished with the HART
©
communications option (HART
©
5 ad HART
©
6).
Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the “R300” designation on the nameplate.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 4
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
ST 3000 transmitter family

Table 1 illustrates the various ST 3000 Release 300 pressure transmitters that are presently available.

Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family
Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model


Differential
Pressure




STD1xx




STD9xx


Differential Pressure
with Flange on One
Side




STF1xx




STF9xx


Dual-Head Gauge
Pressure


Not Available




STG9xx


In-Line Gauge
Pressure and
Absolute




STG1xL
STA1xL




STG9xL
STA9xL

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
5
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters

Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model


Gauge and Absolute
Pressure



STG1xx
STA1xx



STG9xx
STA9xx




Flange-Mount
Liquid Level




STF1xx




STF9xx


Differential Pressure
with Remote
Diaphragm Seals




STR1xx




STR9xx


Flush Mount


Not Available





STG93P



High Temperature



STG14T
STF14T



Not Available


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 6
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - HART Communicator
HART
©
Communicator
Transmitter adjustments
Except for optional local zero and span adjustments, the ST 3000 has no physical adjustments. You need a
HART
©
communicator to make any adjustments in a ST 3000 with the HART
©
communications option.
Transmitter operator interface
The HART
©
communicator (Model 275 or Model 375) is connected to the loop wiring of the ST 3000
transmitter for direct communication with the transmitter. The hand-held communicator “talks” with a
transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4 to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter. A
request/response format is the basis for the communication operation. The transmitter’s microprocessor
receives a communication signal from the communicator, identifies the request, and sends a response
message.
Figure 3 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided by the communicator.

HART
Communicator
Request
Response
4 to 20 mA line
ST 3000
Power
Supply and
Receiver

Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface

HART
©
5 or HART
©
6?
Model 275 is compatible with HART
©
5 only; Model 375 is compatible with HART
©
5 and HART
©
6.
The HART
©
Communicator Purpose
The communicator allows you to adjust transmitter values, or diagnose potential problems from a remote
location such as the control room. You use the communicator to:
- Configure: Define and enter the transmitter’s operating parameters.
- Monitor: Read the input pressure to the transmitter in engineering units and the transmitter’s output in
milliamperes or percent.
- Display: Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or the communicator’s memory.
- Check current output: Use the transmitter to supply the output current desired for verifying analog
loop operation, troubleshooting, or calibrating other components in the analog loop.
- Troubleshoot: Check status of transmitter operation and display diagnostic messages to identify
transmitter, communication, or operator error problems.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
7
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Transmitter Order



ATTENTION
Throughout this manual, procedures are given on how to use the HART
©
communicator to
configure, operate and troubleshoot the ST 3000 transmitter. Keystrokes and screen displays
for the HART
©
communicator are referenced in these procedures. However, additional
information on communicator operation is found in the product manual supplied with the
communicator.
Transmitter Order
Order components
Figure 4 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 transmitter order.


Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components.

About documentation
– ST 3000 HART
©
Transmitter Release 300 User’s Manual, 34-ST-25-17: One CD is shipped with every
transmitter ordered and it contains all relevant ST 3000 documentation. This document provides detailed
information for installing, wiring, configuring, starting up, operating, maintaining, and servicing the ST
3000 transmitter. This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000 transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 8
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option
Local Smart Meter Option
Smart meter assembly
A Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a separate assembly and is integrally
mounted on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA) mounting bracket within the electronics
housing. The meter option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the
transmitter’s PWA. A meter end-cap that includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the
transmitter’s housing so you can view the meter display with the end-cap installed. See Figure 5.

Electronics
Housing
Local Smart
Meter Option

Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
9
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option
Option availability
Depending upon your transmitter model, it can be equipped with one of the available integral local smart
meter and/or zero and span adjust options as shown in Table 2.

Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options
Option Description Available with Transmitter Series
100 900
Local Smart Meter only
%
100 0
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.





Yes




Yes
Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span Adjustments
% 100 0
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO





Yes *





Yes
Local Zero and Span Adjustments only
SPAN
ZERO





Yes *





Yes
* Except draft range, Model STD110.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 10
2— Quick Start Reference - Overview
2— Quick Start Reference
Overview
About this section
This section provides a list of typical start-up tasks and tells you where you can find detailed information
about performing the task.
This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and wired correctly, and is ready to be
put into operation. It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using the HART
©
communicator
and that the transmitter has been configured correctly for your application. If the transmitter has not been
installed and wired, you are not familiar with HART
©
communicator operation, and/or you do not know if
the transmitter is configured correctly, please read the other sections of this manual before starting up your
transmitter.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
11
2— Quick Start Reference - Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 12
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly
Quick start-up tasks
Table 3 lists common start-up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using a HART
©
communicator and gives an
appropriate section in this manual to reference for more information about how to do the task. The start-up
tasks are listed in the order they are commonly completed.
Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference

Task Description Reference Section and Topic
1 Put analog loop into manual mode Appropriate vendor documentation for
controller or recorder used as a
receiver in analog loop with
ST 3000 transmitter.
2
Connect HART
©
communicator to
transmitter and establish
communications.
5 – Getting Started
Establishing Communications
3 Check/set output form (Linear/Square
Root).
6 – Configuration
Pressure Transfer Function
4 Check/set damping time. 6 – Configuration
PV damping
5 Check/set Lower Range Value and
Upper Range Value.
6 – Configuration
Range Values
(See Appendix A for setting range
values using local zero and span
adjustments)
6 Run optional output check for analog
loop
7 – Start Up
Running Analog Output
7 Check zero input and set, if required. 7 – Start Up
See Steps 6 and 7 in Table 29.
8 Check transmitter status 8 – Operation
Accessing Operation Data
9 Setup local Smart Meter, if applicable. Appendix A – Smart meter reference
10 Write data in scratch pad memory, if
desired.
6 – Configuration
Device Information
11 Store all changes in the transmitter's
nonvolatile memory.
6 – Configuration
Configuration Overview

3— Preinstallation Considerations - Overview
3— Preinstallation Considerations
Overview
About this section
This section contains information that you should take into consideration before you install a new
transmitter. The topics in this section include:
- Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
- CE Conformity notice and special conditions for European installations.
- Environmental and operating conditions, which cover operating temperature limits and overpressure
ratings for safe transmitter operation.
- HART
©
communicator interface conditions.
- Operating conditions for transmitters equipped with the smart meter option.
Of course, if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter you may skip this section.
Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
The ST3000 HART
©
Pressure Transmitter can be ordered with the optional Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3
Capability. Detailed description of this capability can be found in the ST3000 Safety Manual (34-ST-25-
31).
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice
About conformity and special conditions
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive.
Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and the following special conditions,
may invalidate this product’s conformity with the EMC Directive.
- You must use shielded, twisted-pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all signal/power wiring.
- You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the wiring only and leave it
insulated at the transmitter side.



ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio
and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the
antenna(e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the
user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic
emissions of this equipment.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
13
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Evaluate conditions
The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as
outdoors. To assure optimum performance, evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to
published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters.

- Environmental Conditions
– Ambient Temperature
– Relative Humidity
- Potential Noise Sources
– Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
– Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
- Vibration Sources
– Pumps
– Motorized Valves
– Valve Cavitation
- Process Characteristics
– Temperature
– Maximum Pressure Rating

Figure 6 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter.


Ambient
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Large Fan Motors
(EMI)
Transceivers
(RFI)
Pump
(vibration)
Meter Body
Temperature
Lightning
(EMI)
21003

Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation
Temperature limits
Table 4 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids.
See transmitter specifications for temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 14
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200)
Transmitter Type and Model Ambient Temperature Process Interface Temperature
°C °F °C °F
Draft Range STD110 -40 to 70 -40 to 158 -40 to 70 -40 to 158
Differential Pressure
STD125
STD120, STD130, STD170
STD904, STD924, STD930,
STD974

-40 to 85
-40 to 85

-40 to 85

-40 to 185
-40 to 185

-40 to 185

-40 to 85
-40 to 125

-40 to 125

-40 to 185
-40 to 257

-40 to 257
Gauge Pressure
STG140, STG170, STG180
STG14L, STG17L, STG18L
STG14T
STG93P
STG944, STG974
STG90L, STG94L, STG97L,
STG98L

-40 to 85
-40 to 85
-40 to 85
-15 to 65
-40 to 85

-40 to 85

-40 to 185
-40 to 185
-40 to 185
5 to 149
-40 to 185

-40 to 185

-40 to 125
-40 to 110
-40 to 150 †
-15 to 95 ††
-40 to 125

-40 to 110

-40 to 257
-40 to 230
-40 to 302 †
5 to 203 ††
-40 to 257

-40 to 230
Absolute Pressure
STA122/12L

-40 to 85

-40 to 185

See Specification Sheet
STA140/14L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
STA922/92L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet
STA940/94L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
STA17L/97L -40 to 85 -40 to 185 -40 to 80 -40 to 176
Flange Mounted
STF128, STF132, STF924, STF932
Pseudo-Flanged Head
STF12F, STF13F, STF92F, STF93F
STF14F
Gauge Pressure Flange Mount
STF14T

-40 to 93

-40 to 93
-40 to 85

-40 to 93

-40 to 200

-40 to 200
-40 to 185

-40 to 200

-40 to 175

-40 to 93
-40 to 85

-40 to 150 †

-40 to 350

-40 to 200
-40 to 185

-40 to 302 †
Remote Diaphragm Seals
STR12D, STR13D, STR14G,
STR17G, STR14A


See Specification Sheet


See Specification Sheet
STR93D, STR94G -40 to 85 -40 to 185 See Specification Sheet
† Process temperatures above 125 °C (257 °F) require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as
follows: Process Temperature Ambient Temperature Limit
150 °C (302 °F) 50 °C (122 °F)
140 °C (284 °F) 60 °C (140 °F)
125 °C (257 °F) 85 °C (185 °F)
†† Process temperatures above 65 °C (149 °F) require a 1:1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature.
Note: For transmitters with local meter option see Appendix A
Note: Transmitters with other fill fluids (CTFE, Neobee, Etc.) have different Operating Temperature Limits. For
more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter
nameplate
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
15
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for HART communicator
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 16
Pressure ratings
Table 5 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper Range Limit (URL). The maximum
allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the pressure used for the approval body safety calculations
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings
Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure
(Note 1)
Overpressure Rating
(Note 1)
Transmitter
Model
Upper Range Limit
Previous New Design Previous New Design
STD110 10 inches H2O
(25 mbar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
STD120,
STD904,
STD924
400 inches H2O
(1 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
STD125 600 inches H2O
(1.5 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
STD130,
STD930
100 psi
(7 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
STD170,
STD974
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
4,500 psi
(310 bar)
STG944 500 psi
(35 bar)
500 psi
(35 bar)
500 psi
(35 bar)
500 psi
(35 bar)
500 psi
(35 bar)
STG974 3,000 psi
(207 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
3,000 psi
(207 bar)
Note 1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Overpressure Rating may vary with materials of
construction and with process temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide. In transmitters with Graphite Gaskets, rating of 50 psi remains
unchanged while ratings of 4,500 psi are reduced to 3,625 psi (250 bar). Flange Adapters with Graphite
Gaskets have a 3,000 psi rating.
Note 2: To convert bar values to kilopascals (kPa), multiply by 100. For example, 3.5 bar equals 350 kPa.
Considerations for HART
©
communicator
Guidelines
When using the communicator to communicate with the transmitter:
- Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 42 Vdc (30 Vdc for intrinsically safe loops).
- Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the communicator and the power supply for
proper communication.
- Refer to communicator product manual for such information as operating limits.

Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option
If your transmitter is to be installed and operated with one of the integral smart meter options, please note
the Smart meter specifications and operating conditions for the meter located in Appendix A of this
manual.
4— Installation - Overview
4— Installation
Overview
About this section
This section provides information about installing the ST 3000 transmitter. The topics in this section
include:
- Mounting the ST 3000 transmitter - various mounting methods are described and can be used
depending upon the transmitter type.
- Piping the transmitter to the process – connecting the transmitter meter body to the process piping or
tank connection.
- Wiring the transmitter – connecting the loop wiring and ground conductors to the transmitter, and
information is given on connecting local and remote indicating meters to the transmitter.
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
You can mount all transmitter models (except flush mount models and those with integral flanges) to a
2-inch (50 millimeter) vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket, or a
bracket of your own. Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1” weld
nipple. Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection.
Figure 7 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
Dimensions
Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are listed in Section 13 in this manual
for reference. Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown in the specification sheets for the
given transmitter models.
The procedures following assume that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and
the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
17
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
Horizontal Pipe
Tank
Wall
Transmitter
Flange
Flange
Connection

Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations

Bracket mounting
Table 6 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket.

Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket

Step Action
1 If you are using an…
Optional mounting bracket, then go to Step 2.
Existing mounting bracket, then go to Step 3.





ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 18
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
19
Step Action
2 Position bracket on 2-inch (50.8 mm) horizontal or vertical pipe, and install “U” bolt around pipe
and through holes in bracket. Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided.
Example - Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe.

Horizontal Pipe
Mounting
Bracket
Nuts and
Lockwashers
Nuts and
Lockwashers
U-Bolt
U-Bolt
Mounting
Bracket
Vertical Pipe


3 Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts and
washers provided.
If transmitter is …
÷ DP type with double-ended process heads and/or remote seals, then use alternate
mounting holes in end of heads
÷ GP or AP with single-ended head, then use mounting holes in side of meter body.
÷ In-line GP or AP, then use smaller “U” bolt provided to attach meter body to bracket. See
figure below.
÷ Dual-head GP or AP, then use mounting holes in end of process head.

Inline Models
Meter Body
Smaller
“U” bolt
Use bracket for
hexagonal meter body


Note: If the meter body is hexagonal, you must use the additional bracket supplied. If meter
body is round, discard the bracket.
4 Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn. Rotate electronics housing in
maximum of 180 degree increment in left or right direction from center to position you require
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 20
Step Action
and tighten set screw (13 to 15 lb-in/1.46 to 1.68 N
.
m).
Example - Rotating electronics housing.
Set Screw
Electronics
Housing
180 degrees
max.
180 degrees
max.

The metric socket head wrench kit supplied includes 2.5, 3, and 4mm size wrenches. You will
need the 4mm size wrench for the outside set screw.

Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans
To minimize positional effects on pressure measurement and calibration (zero shift), take the appropriate
mounting precautions that follow for transmitters with small pressure spans.
Absolute Pressure and In-line Transmitters
For absolute pressure and inline transmitters you must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting
it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on
how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance.
Absolute pressure models

Center
Section
Process
Head
Position spirit balance on
center section of meter
body only.

4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
In-line models


Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy. Position spirit balance on pressure
connection surface of AP body.
Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters



CAUTION
The mounting position of a model STA122 or STA922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a
model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter
spans become smaller. A maximum zero shift of 2.5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1.5
in H
2
O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which is rotated 90
degrees from vertical. A typical zero shift of 0.12 mm Hg or 0.20 in H
2
O can occur for a 5
degree rotation from vertical.

Differential Pressure Transmitters
For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span (Model STD110, for example), you must ensure
that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and
front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance. You must
also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 7 below.

Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span
Step Action
1 Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting
bolts.
2 Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure (HP) and low pressure
(LP) heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
21
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 22
Step Action
3 Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a milliammeter in series in the loop
circuit to read the transmitter’s output current. See figure for typical connections.

-
+
-
+
250
ohms
Power
Supply
Receiver
+
-
Voltmeter
Field
Terminals
Precision
Milliammeter
Communicat or
Differenti al Pressure
Type Transmi tter



4 Connect a communicator and establish communications with the transmitter. Follow the steps
in Table 15, if needed.
5 While reading the transmitter’s output on the milliammeter, position the transmitter so the
output reading is at or near zero and then completely tighten the mounting bolts.
6 Follow the steps below to do an input zero correct function using the communicator. This
corrects the transmitter for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are
tightened.
7 Starting from “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
- Device setup
- Diag/Service
- Calibration
- Zero Trim
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
You will be prompted that this procedure will affect sensor calibration. Press OK.
Press OK to initiate zero input corrects.
You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. Press OK
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
23
Step Action
8 Remove the tube from between the input connections, the power, and the milliammeter and
communicator.
If device is not “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” skip to step 13.
9* On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date”, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter
10* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter
11* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field)”, enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter
12* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field)”, enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter
13 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.
14 Continue with the remaining installation tasks.

*HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to “Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records” under the
“Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.

Flange mounting
Transmitters that are furnished with integral flange connections (models STFxxx), are bolted directly to the
process flange connection. Figure 9 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange on the high
pressure (HP) side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid. The low pressure (LP)
side of the transmitter is vented to atmosphere (no connection).
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s flange to the flange pipe on the wall of
the tank.



ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.

It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitter’s service condition.
To prevent degradation of performance in Flush-Mounted Flanged Transmitters, exercise care to
ensure that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm.
To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters, ensure that
there is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body.

4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Variable
Head H1
Reference
Leg
Attention: Dotted area indicates use
with closed tank with reference leg.
LP Side vented
to atmosphere
HP Side
mounted
to tank
Minimum Level
Maximum Level

Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation
Flush mounting
ST 3000 flush mount transmitters (model STG9xx) are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank using a
1 inch weld nipple. Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe.
Follow the steps in Table 8 to install a flush mount transmitter.
Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation

Step Action
1 Cut a hole for a 1” standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted



ATTENTION
On insulated tanks and pipes, remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting
sleeve.

2 Weld the 1” mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe
3 Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking
bolt
4 Tighten the bolt to a torque of 6,4 Nm+/- 0,30 Nm [4.7 ft.-lbs. +/- 0.2 ft.-lbs.]
5 Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 24
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
1" Pipe Mount -
316 SS Weld Nipple
(standard option)

Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
25
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
High Temperature Transmitter Mounting
You can mount the high temperature transmitter directly to the process flange connection or the process
piping.













Figure 11 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s flange to the flange on the wall of the
tank or process pipe.
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for
the transmitter’s service condition.


ATTENTION

On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.

Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position.
See Table 6, step 4.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 26
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter















Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
27
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 28
Remote seal mounting
ST 3000 transmitters furnished with remote diaphragm seals (models STRxxx) can be mounted using the
optional mounting brackets. (See procedure in Table 6 in this section for bracket mounting.) Follow the
guidelines below to determine the mounting position of the remote seals for the given fill fluid and then use
the procedure in Table 9 to mount the remote seals to the process connections.
Figure 12 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference.



WARNING
Mount the remote seal flanges within the limits stated below for the given fill-fluid in the
capillary tubes.


IF the fill fluid is… THEN mount the flange…
Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet (6.7 meters) below the transmitter.
Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet (5.8 meters) below the transmitter.
Chlorotrifluorethylene (CTFE) no greater than 11 feet (3.4 meters) below the transmitter.
NOTE: The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi
(300 mm Hg) absolute.

Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter

Step Action
1 Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of capillary tubing.
2 To measure variable head H1, mount remote seals on tank walls as follows:
-
-
If Transmitter Model Number is…
STR93D or STR12D, then connect remote seal on high pressure (HP) side of
transmitter to either the lower flange or the upper flange.
If Transmitter Model Number is…
STR13D, the remote seal on low pressure (LP) side of transmitter must be connected
to lower flange.
See Figure 12.



ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.


3 It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitter’s service condition


4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Variable
Head H1
HP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
LP Side
- Model STR13D
Minimum Level
Maximum Level
LP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
HP Side
- Model STR13D
H2
Fixed
Ref. Leg

Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
29
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Piping Arrangements
The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the
transmitter model. Except for flush, flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections, process connections
are made to ¼ or ½ NPT female connections in the process head of the transmitter’s meter body. For
example, a differential pressure transmitter comes with double-ended process heads with ¼ NPT
connections but they can be modified to accept ½ inch NPT through optional flange adapters. Some gauge
pressure transmitters may have a ½ NPT connection that mounts directly to a process pipe.
The most common type of pipe used is ½ schedule 80 steel pipe. Many piping arrangements use a three-
valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter. A manifold makes it easy to install and
remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process. It also accommodates the installation of
blow-down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter.
Figure 13 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three-valve manifold and blow-down
lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 30

Blow-Down
Valve
3-Valve
Manifold
To Upstream Tap To Downstream Tap
To Low Pressure
Side of Transmitter
To High Pressure
Side of Transmitter
Blow-Down
Valve
Blow-Down
Piping
To Waste To Waste
Blow-Down
Piping
21010

Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement.
Another piping arrangement uses a block-off valve and a tee connector in the process piping to the
transmitter as shown in Figure 14.
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter

Block-off Valve
1/2" NPT
Connection
Tank Wall

Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½ NPT Process Connection
Transmitter location
Table 10 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process.
Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes

Process Suggested Location Explanation
Liquids 1. Below but close to the
elevation of the process
connection.
2. Level with or above the
process connection.

1. This minimizes the static
head effect of the
condensate.
2. This requires a siphon to
protect the transmitter from
process steam. The siphon
retains water as a “fill fluid.”
Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away
from the transmitter



ATTENTION
- For liquid or steam, the piping should slope a minimum of 25.4 mm (1 inch) per 305 mm (1
foot). Slope the piping down towards the transmitter if the transmitter is below the process
connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid. If the transmitter
is located above the process connection, the piping should rise vertically above the
transmitter; then slope down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point.

- For gas measurement, use a condensate leg and drain at the low point (freeze protection
may be required here). See Appendix C for some suggested freeze protection solutions.




ATTENTION
Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes. The operating temperature
limits for the device (as outlined in Table 3) must not be exceeded. Impulse piping may be
used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter
meter body. As a general rule there is a 56°C drop (100°F) in the temperature of the process
for every foot of 1/2" uninsulated piping.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
31
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 32
Process connections
Table 11 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter.
Table 11 Process Connections
Transmitter Type Process Connection
Differential Pressure -
-
-
Process heads with 1/4 NPT female connection.
Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connection are
optional.
Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2- or 3-inch ANSI class
150 flange.
Gauge Pressure - Process head with 1/2 NPT female connection (Series 100).
- In-line 1/2 NPT female connection (STGxxL).
-
-
-
-
-
-
In-line 1/2 NPT male
9/16 Aminco
DIN19213
Process heads with 1/4 NPT female connection (STG9x4).
- Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connections are
optional (STG9x4).
2-inch Sanitary Tri-Clamp (STGxxT).
Flush mount in 1” weld sleeve, with O-ring and locking bolt (STGxxP).
Absolute Pressure Process head with 1/2 NPT female connection. (STAx22, x40, STAx2L,
STA4xL)
-
-
-
-
In-line ½ NPT female
In-line ½ NPT male
9/16 Aminco
DIN19213
Flange Mounted
Liquid Level
Small flange 1/2-inch, 1-, 1 ½ - and 2-inch (STFxxT)
2, 3- or 4-inch flange with flush or 2-, 4- or 6-inch extended diaphragm (See
Table 12) on high pressure side.*
- DN 50, 80, or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2, 4 or 6 inch extended
diaphragm (See Table 12) on High Pressure Side*.
Remote Diaphragm
Seals
See model selection guide for description of available flanged, threaded,
chemical tee, saddle, and sanitary process connections.
* Reference side has standard differential pressure process head.
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Flange descriptions
Table 12 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters.

Table 12 Flange Description
Diaphragm Type Description
Flush or Extended
Diaphragm
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 120.7 mm
(4.75 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm (5.91 in).
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 127 mm
(5.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
3-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152.4 mm
(6.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7.48 in).

3-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 168.3
mm (6.62 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm (8.27 in).

4-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 190.5
mm (7.50 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm (9.05 in).
4-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 255 mm
(10.04 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 50 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 4 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 125
mm (4.92 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
DN 80 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 160
mm (6.30 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 100 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22 mm (0.87 in) diameter on 190
mm (7.48 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm (9.25 in).
Pseudo Flange Head 2-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 15.9 mm (5/8 in) diameter on
120.6 mm (4-3/4 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152.4 mm (6 in).

3-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on
152 mm (6 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7-1/2 in).

Flush Mount
Gauge STG93P
25.4 mm (1-inch) pipe mount. (316L SS standard option.)
General piping guidelines
- When measuring fluids containing suspended solids, install permanent valves at regular intervals to
blow-down piping.
- Blow-down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process
fluids (where possible) before connecting these lines to the transmitter’s meter body.
- Be sure all the valves in the blow-down lines are closed tight after the initial blow-down procedure
and each maintenance procedure after that.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
33
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Installing flange adapter
Table 13 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process head.


ATTENTION
Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you insert it into the adapter
may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head.
To deform the gasket, submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its
recessed mounting groove in the adapter.

Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter

Step Action
1 Insert filter screen (if supplied) into inlet cavity of process head.
2 Carefully seat Teflon (white) gasket into adapter groove.
3 Thread adapter onto 1/2-inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in
end of process head as required.
4 Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7/16-20 hex-head bolts.
Example - Installing adapter on process head.

Process
Head
Filter Screen
Teflon Gasket
Flange Adapter
7/16 x 20 Bolts
21011


ATTENTION

Apply an anti-seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the
process head.

5 Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 47,5 N-m +/- 2,4 N-m (35 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft)



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 34
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
The transmitter is designed to operate in a two-wire power/current loop with loop resistance and power
supply voltage within the operating range shown in Figure 15. When option LP (lightning protection)
and/or remote smart meter are selected, the voltage drop for these options must be added to the basic
transmitter voltage of 10.8 V to determine V
XMTR
and R
LOOP MAX
. Additional consideration is required
when selecting intrinsic safety barriers to insure that the barriers will supply V
XMTR MIN
including the
required 250 ohms (typically within the barriers) for digital communications.
Transmitter Parameters:
R
LOOP MAX
= The maximum loop resistance (barriers plus wiring) that will allow proper transmitter
operation.
Therefore, R
LOOP MAX
= (V
SUPPLY MIN
– V
XMTR MIN
) ÷ 21.8 mA
Where, V
XMTR MIN
= 10.8 V + V
LP
+ V
SM
V
LP
= 1.1 V, lightning protection option, LP
V
SM
= 2.3 V, remote smart meter
(Please note that V
SM
should only be considered if a remote smart meter
will be connected to the transmitter.)
0 10.8 16.28 20.63 25 28.3 37.0 42.4
250
450
650
800
1200
1440
Operati ng Vol tage (Vdc)
= Operating
Area
NOTE: A minimum of
250 0hms of loop
resistance is
necessary to support
communications. Loop
resistance equals
barrier resistance plus
wire resistance plus
receiver resistance.
Also 45 volt operation
is permitted if not an
intrinsically safe
installation.
Loop
Resi stance
(ohms)
21012

Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters.
The positive and negative loop wires are connected to the positive (+) and negative (–) SIGNAL terminals
on the terminal block in the transmitter’s electronics housing as shown in Figure 16.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
35
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
3-Screw Terminal Block 5-Screw Terminal Block
Lightning Protection Option (option LP)
-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
Terminal
Block
Electronics
Housing
Internal
Ground
Terminal

+
+
-
-
L-
S
I
G
N
A
L
M
E
T
E
R
T
E
S
T
S
I
G
N
A
L
-
+
+
-
Terminal
Block
Electronics
Housing
Internal
Ground
Terminal

Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks
Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground. A ground
terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing. While it is not necessary to
ground the transmitter for proper operation, we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of
“noise” on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge
damage. Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification. Refer to
Section 3, CE Conformity (Europe) Notice for special conditions.
Optional lightning protection (option LP) can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed in areas
highly susceptible to lightning strikes. Figure 17 shows the 5-screw terminal block used when the lightning
protection option is ordered.
Barriers can be installed per manufacturer’s instructions for transmitters to be used in intrinsically safe
applications.
Wiring connections
The procedure in Table 14 shows the steps for connecting loop power to the transmitter. For loop wiring
and external wiring diagrams, refer to the installation drawings presented in Section 13. Detailed drawings
are provided for transmitter installation in non-intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in
hazardous area locations.



ATTENTION
All wiring must comply with local codes, regulations, and ordinances.
If you will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area, be sure to review the hazardous
location reference data included in Appendix D of this manual before wiring and operating the
transmitter.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 36
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter

Step Action
1 Loosen end-cap lock using a 1.5 mm allen wrench and remove end-cap cover from terminal
block end of electronics housing.

2

Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing.
Plug whichever entrance you do not use.
The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire.

3 Observing polarity, connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL + terminal and negative loop
power lead to SIGNAL – terminal. See figures.

3-screw terminal block 5-screw terminal (option LP)
+
+
-
-
L
-
S
I
G
N
A
L
M
E
T
E
R
T
E
S
T
S
I
G
N
A
L
-
+
+
-
+
-
Loop
Power
-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
+
-
Loop
Power
4 Replace end-cap, and tighten end-cap lock.

Approval body requirements
If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self-declared approval per 94/9/EC (ATEX4),
you must use a power supply that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the
transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc. You can achieve this by using a battery as the supply or one of these
voltage limiting means.
- Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent.
- An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly higher than the rated voltage.
- An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
37
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Lightning protection
When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection (option LP), you must connect a wire
from the transmitter to ground as shown in Figure 17 to make the protection effective. We recommend that
you use a size 8 AWG (American Wire Gage) or (8.37mm
2
) bare or green covered wire.
Electronics
Housing
Connect to
Earth Ground

Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.
Process Sealing
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual
Seal” devices in accordance with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing between
Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.
Explosionproof Conduit seal
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group A Hazardous (Classified) Location
in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the US National Electrical Code (NEC), require a “LISTED”
explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit, within 18 inches of the transmitter. Crouse-Hinds® type
EYS/EYD or EYSX/EYDX are examples of “LISTED” explosionproof seals that meets this requirement.
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group B, C or D Hazardous (Classified)
Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit.


ATTENTION

Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements.




WARNING
When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location, keep covers tight while
the transmitter is energized. Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area
prior to removing end caps for service.

When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location, disconnect power to the
transmitter in the non-hazardous area, or determine that the location is non-hazardous prior to
disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 38
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
39
Output meter options
The ST 3000 transmitter can be equipped with any of these three optional output indicating meters that
provide a 0 to 100% indication of the transmitter’s output.

Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter
Integral Smart Meter with local zero and span
adjustments
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0
-
SPAN
ZERO
% 100 0

Meter Output indication –
-
-
-
17-segment bargraph and LCD digital readout.
Meter provides indication of transmitter’s PV
output in percent of span or in actual
engineering units. The meter also can
display custom units.
Transmitter status also is displayed.
Integral smart meter connections — The new
integral smart meter (8-wires) is connected
directly to the transmitter’s PWA and is mounted
to the electronics module assembly inside the
electronics housing. The meter display is viewed
through a window in the transmitter’s end cap.
The new integral smart meter is designed for the
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and provides
functionality not available with other smart meter
designs.
See Appendix A for other options of this meter
and detailed information about smart meter set up
and operation.




ATTENTION
Only one smart meter should be installed integrally to the transmitter.


Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter
Analog meter
8
0
1
0
0
60 40
2
0
0
%
10
2
4
6
8
1
0

Meter Output indication –
- Traditional pointer and scale.
Analog meter connections — You can connect
the analog meter (2-wires) integrally to Release
300 transmitter’s terminal block inside the
electronics housing. However, there are alternate
wiring methods for connecting an analog meter
remotely with the loop wiring. Section 13 in this
manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for
connecting an analog meter to Release 300
transmitters.


4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
The third output meter option is a meter display that can be mounted remotely in a separate housing.
Meter type Wiring Connections to Transmitter
SM 3000 smart meter connections — The smart
meter (3-wires) can be connected remotely to a
Release 300 transmitter. Section 13 in this
manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for
connecting this smart meter to Release 300
transmitters.
SM 3000 Smart meter
0 100 %



Meter Output indication –
17-segment bargraph and digital readout to
show PV out in % of span.
-


ATTENTION

Be aware that the SM 3000 remote meter only shows PV output in % of span and does not
display transmitter output in custom or flow units like the new smart meter. Therefore, if you
use an SM 3000 remote meter in conjunction with a new smart meter that is configured to
display readings in custom or flow units, the indications of the two meters will be displayed in
different units.



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 40
5— Getting Started - Overview
5— Getting Started
Overview
About this section
This section tells you how to establish communications with the ST 3000 and make initial checks of the
transmitter’s settings and configuration using a HART
©
hand-held communicator. This section includes
these topics:
- Verifying that the HART
©
communicator contains the proper software version for communicating the
ST 3000 transmitter.
- Making proper connections of the HART
©
communicator to the ST 3000 transmitter.
- Begin communications between the transmitter and the communicator.
- Make initial checks to the transmitter, such as checking factory set configuration, verify write protect
option and failsafe direction, and change if necessary.
Establishing Communications
Software compatibility
You need to make sure your HART
©
communicator contains software that is compatible with the ST 3000
HART
©
transmitter.
To check software revision contained in the communicator:
1. Turn on the communicator and access the “Offline” menu.
2. Press “4” to select the Utility menu.
3. Press “5” to select Simulation mode.
4. The Manufacturer menu appears. Select “Honeywell”.
5. Select Model “ST3000”.
6. View the software revisions available for the selected model.
The software versions that are compatible with the ST 3000 HART
©
Release 300 Smart Transmitter are:
ST 3000 HART
©
5 Version: Dev v2 (Device version 2)
DD v1 (Device Description version 1)
ST 3000 HART
©
6 Version: Dev v4 (Device version 4)
DD 2 (Device Description version 2)
ST3000 HART
©
6 Advanced Diagnostics Version: Dev v5 (Device version 5)
DD v1 (Device Description version 1)


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
41
5— Getting Started - Establishing Communications
Upgrading HART
©
communicator software
The memory module in the HART
©
communicator is programmed with device descriptions for specific
HART
©
-compatible devices. These device descriptions allow the communicator to recognize and “talk to”
the compatible devices. If you find that your communicator does not contain the necessary application
software and device descriptions, contact your Honeywell sales representative about upgrading your
communicator. See also the product manual that was supplied with your communicator for further
information.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 42
5— Getting Started - Establishing Communications
Connecting the communicator
You connect the hand-held communicator directly to signal terminals on the transmitter’s terminal block or
at any convenient location in the 4 to 20 milliampere loop wiring. (Polarity of the communicator
connection does not matter.)



WARNING
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.

Figure 18 shows typical communicator connections across loop wiring to a ST 3000 transmitter.

-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
Power
Supply
+
-
Receiver
+
-
Field
Terminals
Communi cator
ST 3000
250 ohm
Note: Polarity of the Communicator
connection does not matter.

Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
43
5— Getting Started - Establishing Communications
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 44
Starting communications
Once you connect the communicator to the transmitter, you are ready to start communicating with the
transmitter. The procedure in Table 15 outlines the steps for starting communications with an ST 3000
transmitter without an assigned tag number.
Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter

Step Action
1 Turn on communicator. The communicator runs a self-test check then determines if it is
connected to a transmitter.
2 If you receive a communication error message (No Device Found), check the following:
-
-
Loop resistance: Is there a minimum of 250 ohms resistance between the communicator
and the power supply?
Power supply: Is power applied? Is there greater than 11 volts at the transmitter? Are you
within the operating area shown in Figure 15?
Correct any problems, then try communicating again.
If the message, or any other error message, appears again, refer to Section 11 –
Troubleshooting for probable cause.
3 If the transmitter is reporting any status messages, which will be displayed at this time, refer to
Section 11 – Troubleshooting for more information.
When the “Online” display—similar to the one below—appears, you have established
communications with the transmitter.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
3
4
5
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
1
2
Device setup
PV

Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be displayed in the Online display,
(due to the limitations of the communicator display). To view these values you must use
the down arrow key to select the value and then press the right arrow key to display the
value in detail.



ATTENTION
The flashing heart icon in the upper right corner indicates the communicator and transmitter
are “talking.”

5— Getting Started - Making Initial Checks
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
45
Making Initial Checks
Checking configuration data
Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to review the transmitter’s factory-set configuration
parameters. Table 16 outlines the steps.
Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters

Step Action
1 From the “Online” menu, enter “Device setup” by pressing the right arrow (¬) key on the
communicator keypad.
2 Press the down arrow (¹) key to scroll down to menu-item “5 Review”. When highlighted press
the right arrow (¬) key to enter review function. A display similar to the one shown below
appears.
ST3000:PT 3011
Review
Manufacturer
Honeywell
HELP EXIT PREV NEXT

3 Press PREV and/or NEXT to scroll through and view the configuration data, including:
- Manufacturer*
- Transmitter model*
- Transmitter Measurement type*
- PV unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Maximum and minimum range limits
- PV LRL
- PV URL*
- PV LTL***
- PV UTL***
- PV Damping
- PV output in % of range
- PV transfer function (Output conformity)
- PV upper range value (URV)
- PV lower range value (LRV)
- PV AO (analog output) in milliamperes
- PV AO alarm option (failsafe direction)**
- SV (Secondary Variable) unit
- PROM ID*
- Tag name
- Long tag name***
- Date

- Descriptor
- Message
- Meter Units***
- Write protection**
- Final assembly number
Device ID*
Universal revision*
Field device revision*
Software revision*
Polling address
Loop Current Mode***
Configuration Change Counter***
Number of required preambles*
Install Date****
Power Fail Count****
Electronics Temperature****
- % Life in Stress****
% Service Life Used****
Static Pressure*****

This information is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.
** Alarm option and transmitter security are jumper-selectable on the electronics board.
***HART
©
6 only.
5— Getting Started - Making Initial Checks
Step Action
**** HART
©
6 with Universal rev 6, Field device rev 5, Software rev 36
***** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP
type meter bodies.
For more details , refer to “Review parameters” under the “Advanced Diagnostics Release for
ST 3000” topic
4 After reviewing the transmitter data, press EXIT which takes you back to the “Device setup”
display.

Transmitter write protection option
The ST 3000 transmitters have a transmitter security option, also known as a “write protect option,” which
is jumper-selectable. When the write protect option is ordered, transmitters are shipped with a default
jumper position for read-only. This means that the transmitter’s configuration database can not be
overwritten. To allow read/write access, the jumper can be moved to the read/write position. When the
write protect option is not ordered access is read/write. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer
to the procedure in Section 8. Figure 19 below shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA.
Note that if the SL (SIL option) has been specified in the model number and the user intends to operate the
device in the safety mode, then the write protect jumper must be in the write protect position.


Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location
Failure mode (Failsafe) alarm jumper
ST 3000 transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the
transmitter’s output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
You can change the direction from upscale to downscale (minimum output) by cutting jumper W1 on the
transmitter’s PWA. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer to the procedure in Section 8.
Figure 19 shows the location of failure mode alarm jumper on the PWA.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 46
5— Getting Started - Making Initial Checks
Local smart meter display indications
If your ST 3000 transmitter is equipped with the smart meter option, you can check the status of all the
indicators on the local smart meter LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter. The meter runs a brief
self-test whenever power is applied to the transmitter. All the display indicators are lit during the self-test
as shown in Figure 20. (Note that the display may revert to dashes (– – –) after the self-test until the
transmitter initializes all its functions.)
% 100 0
18 8.8
ANALOG
%
FLOW
In H O
2
K
GPH mmHg
GPM PSI A
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
0
-
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
.
KNOWN VALUE

Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.
Please refer to Table A-2 in Appendix A for a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face. Appendix
A in this manual contains procedures for setting up the meter display, as well as descriptions of the meter
indicators, with examples of typical display indications and error codes. Use the communicator to check the
transmitter’s status.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
47
6— Configuration - Overview

6— Configuration
Overview
About this section
This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration. It identifies the parameters that make up
the transmitter’s configuration database and provides procedures for entering values/selections for the
given configuration parameters.
This section also provides an overview of the HART
©
communicator, including data on menus and
keyboard, descriptions of display selections and symbols, and information on making changes using the
communicator.
Section contents
This section includes these topics.
- An overview of the configuration process and how messages are exchanged between transmitter and
communicator.
- A summary of the ST 3000 configuration parameters and how to access this data using the
communicator.
- An overview of the communicator keyboard, displays and menu structure.
- Procedures for configuring the ST 3000 transmitter with the communicator.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 48
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Configuration Overview
About configuration
Each ST 3000 transmitter includes a configuration database that defines its particular operating
characteristics. You can use a communicator to change selected parameters within a given transmitter’s
database to alter its operating characteristics. This process of viewing and/or changing database parameters
is called “configuration.”
Figure 21 shows a graphic summary of the configuration process.

ST 3000
Configurati on Database
Transmitter's
Operating
Characteristics
View and/or
change
database
parameters
HART
Communicator

Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process
Transmitter configuration can be accomplished both on-line— with the transmitter powered up and
connected to the communicator, or off-line— where you enter the configuration in the communicator and
then store it in memory for later downloading to the transmitter
Communicator and ST 3000 transmitter memories
As shown in Figure 22, both the communicator and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories. They
serve as temporary storage areas for data exchanged between them during communications.
The transmitter also has a nonvolatile memory that is the permanent storage area for a backup copy of all
the data held in the working memory. Nonvolatile memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses
power.
The communicator has a second temporary storage area called the off-line memory (memory module or
data pack). It serves as a permanent storage area for a saved configuration database. The memory module
or data pack supports the communicator’s SEND function to restore a saved configuration database to a
transmitter. Figure 22 shows the working relationship between communicator and transmitter memories
during communications.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
49
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Working
Memory
Working
Memory
Nonvolatile
Memory
Memory Module
or
Data Pack
(Nonvolatile)
ST 3000
HART
Communicator


Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories

Copying transmitter configuration into nonvolatile memory
When setting up or configuring a ST 3000, whether you are changing one value or a configuration
database, all configuration data must be copied into the transmitter’s non-volatile memory to ensure the
security of the data.
Normally, thirty seconds after a value is changed, the transmitter automatically copies it from the
transmitter’s working memory into nonvolatile memory. But, if you change a value and power is
interrupted to the transmitter before the change is copied to nonvolatile memory, you will lose the data in
the working memory and it will not be saved in nonvolatile memory.
Therefore, when data is sent (downloaded) to the transmitter, be sure power to the transmitter is not
interrupted before it can be copied to nonvolatile memory.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 50
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
What to configure
Table 17 summarizes the parameters that are included in the configuration database for a ST 3000 pressure
transmitter.
Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters

Configuration Data Setting or Selection
Tag
(Transmitter Tag Number)
Key in a tag identification up to eight characters in length.

Select any one of the pre-programmed engineering units.

PV unit
(Unit of Measurement)
ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water ranges are factory
calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2°F
(4°C).
Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre-
programmed engineering units:
inH2O bar torr
inHg mbar atm
ftH2O g/Sq cm MPa
mmH2O kg/Sq cm inH2O @ 4degC
mmHg Pa mmH2O @ 4degC
psi kPa inH2O @ 60degF

Range Values
PV LRV
(Lower Range Value)
Process input for
4 mA (0%) output
Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set LRV to
applied pressure.
PV URV
(Upper Range Value)
Process input for
20 mA (100%) output
Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set URV to
applied pressure.
Local meter Setup parameters for integral smart meter display.
Installed (Read only – detects if meter is installed in transmitter)
Units (Engineering units for meter display)
Upper (Upper display limit, if applicable)
Lower (Lower display limit, if applicable)








Table continued on next page ¬
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
51
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Configuration Data Setting or Selection
Device Information Select or key in the following device-specific information for:
Manufacturer * Message
Model * Write protect **
Measurement Type * Final assembly number
PROM ID * Device ID *
Tag Loop current mode***
Long tag*** Revision numbers *
Config. Change counter*** Universal revision *
Date Field device revision *
Descriptor Software revision *
* This information is fixed and is read-only.
** Write protect is jumper–selectable on the transmitter PWA. See
Section 8.
***HART
©
6 only.
PV transfer function
(Output Conformity)
Select either: Linear
Square Root
Select one of these values (in seconds):
PV Damping
(Damping Time Constant)
0.00 0.32 1.00 4.00 16.0
0.16 0.48 2.00 8.00 32.0
Select one of the temperature units for display of the secondary
variable or meter body temperature.
SV unit
(Secondary Variable)
Deg C deg F deg R K

Select the device address for the transmitter. Poll Address
HART
©
5: Select address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog
mode, as well as support for HART
©
communications. (Factory set
address)
Select address 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating in multidrop mode.
HART
©
6: Select address 0 to 63.

Interface menus
Information available through the communicator is accessed through menus. The procedures in this manual
give the shortest path from the “Online” (or HOME) menu. There are alternate paths which, depending on
your starting point, may be better suited.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 52
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
HART
©
5 Online menu
The online menu is displayed when the 275 or 375 communicator is connected to a powered transmitter or
the loop wiring and is switched on. Figure 23 summarizes the menus available from the “Online” menu.
See page numbers for information.
ONLINE
Device setup
PV (p. 90)
PV AO (p. 90)
PV LRV (p. 58)
PV URV (p. 58)
Process variables
Pressure
Pressure % range (p. 90)
AO
SV (p. 91)
Diagnostics/Service
Master reset
Device Status (p. 91)
Loop test (p. 68)
Calibration
D/A trim (p. 110)
Zero Trim (p. 71, 81)
Apply Values (p. 59, 73, 75, 77, 78, 81, 85, 86)
Enter Values
Correct Input LRV (p. 111)
Correct Input URV (p. 112)
Reset corrects (p. 113)
Critical (p. 91)
Non-Critical (p. 91)
Basic Setup
Tag (p. 48
PV Unit (p. 48)
Range values (p. 48)
Local Meter (p. 140)
Device Info (p. 60)
PV Transfer function (p. 61)
PV Damping (p. 63)
SV Units (p. 64)
PV LRV
PV URV
PV LRL
PV URL
Installed
Units
Upper
Lower
Manufacturer Date Device ID
Model Descriptor Revision numbers
Measurement type Message (p. 49, 60) Universal rev
PROM ID Write protect Field device rev
Tag (p. 48) Final assembly number Software rev
Detailed Setup
Sensors
Signal condition
Output condition
Device info
Analog output
HART output
AO Out
AO Alarm type
Loop test
D/A Trim
Scaled D/A trim
PV Damping (p. 63)
PV URV (p. 58)
PV LRV (p. 58)
PV Transfer function (p. 61)
PV %Range (p. 90)
PV
PV Unit (p. 48)
Sensor Info
SV (p. 91)
SV unit
Poll address
Num required
preambles
Review (p. 42)
Manufacturer PV Damping PV AO Descriptor Universal rev
Model PV % Range PV AO Alarm type Message Field Device rev
Measurement type PV transfer function SV Unit Units Software rev
PV Unit PV URV PROM ID Write protect Poll address
PV URL PV LRV Tag Final assembly number Number of
PV LRL Date Device ID required
preambles
LRL
URL
To HART Communicator menu
HOME menu

Figure 23 HART
©
5 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
53
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
HART
©
6 Online menu
The online menu is displayed when the communicator is connected to a powered transmitter or the loop
wiring and is switched on. Figure 24 summarizes the menus available from the “Online” menu. See page
numbers for information.

Figure 23a HART 6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary
ONLINE
Device setup
PV
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
Process variables
PV
Pressure % range
PV AO
SV
Electronics Temperature*
Static Pressure**
Diagnostics/Service
Master reset
Device Status
Loop test
Calibration
D/A trim
Advanced Diagnostics*
Zero Trim
Zero Trim Records*
Apply Values
Enter Values
Correct Input LRV
Correct LRV Records*
Correct Input URV
Correct URV Records*
Reset corrects
Critical
Non-Critical
Info (Op Volts < 10)*
Ext dev status
Basic Setup
Tag
Long tag
PV Unit
Range values
Local Meter
Device Info
PV Transfer function
PV Damping
SV Units
PV LRV LTL
PV URV UTL
LRL
URL
Installed
Units
Meter Upper Limit
Meter Lower Limit
Manufacturer Config Change Counter Device ID Install Date*
Model Date Loop Current Mode Model Number*
Meas type Descriptor Revision numbers Material*
PROM ID Message Universal rev
Tag Write protect Field device rev
Long tag Final assembly number Software rev
Detailed Setup
Sensors
Signal condition
Output condition
Device info
Analog output
HART output
PV AO
PV AO Alarm type
Loop Current Mode
Loop test
D/A Trim
Scaled D/A trim
PV Damping
PV URV
PV LRV
PV Transfer function
Pressure % Range
PV
PV Unit
Sensor Info
SV
SV unit
Poll address
Num required preambles
Review
Manufacturer PV % Range Long tag Universal rev Install Date*
Model PV Xfer function Date Field Device rev Power Fail Count*
Measurement type PV URV Descriptor Software rev Electronics Temperature*
PV Units PV LRV Message Poll address % Service Life in Stress*
PV LRL PV AO Meter Units Loop Current Mode % Service Life Used*
PV URL PV Alarm type Write protect Configuration Change Counter Static Pressure **
PV LTL SV Units Final assembly number Number of required preambles Tag
PV UTL PV Damping PROM ID Device ID
LRL LTL
URL UTL
MBT Tracking Diagnostics*
% Service Life Used
SP Tracking Diagnostics. *
PV Tracking Diagnostics*
Operating Voltage*
ET Tracking Diagnostics*
Power Up Diagnosticss*
% Service Life in Stress
Time in Service
Install Date
To HART Communicator HOME menu
Figure 24 HART
©
6 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 54
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Note: * next to the parameter indicates that this parameter is available only in the ST 3000 HART
©
6 with
the following Version information:
** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP type meter
bodies.

Universal rev: 6
Field device rev: 5
Software rev: 36
HART
©
5 275 or 375 Communicator menu
Figure 25 summarizes the menus available from the “HART
©
Communicator” menu. The “HART
©

Communicator” menu is accessed by backing out (pressing the left arrow on the keypad) from the “Online”
menu.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
55
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview

Edit
Copy to . . .
Send
Print
Delete
Rename
Compare
HART Communicator
Offline
Online
Frequency device
Utility
Offline
New configuration
Saved Configuration
Module, Data pack
or PC contents
Manufacturer
Model
Field device rev.
From blank template
Mark all
Unmark all
Edit individually
PV unit
PV Damping
PV URV
PV LRV
Transfer f unction
Temperat ure unit
Tag
Message
Takes you to HOME menu
See Figur e 23.
Frequency device
Frequency
Pressure
Ut ilit y
Configure Communicator
System Information
Listen for PC
St orage Location
Simulation
Communicat or setup and operation settings.
Please refer to the communicator product manual or use the online help
for details on these menu options.
Polling
Contrast
Off Time
Ignore diagnostics
Delete Configuration
Specifies storage location (memory)
where you want the configuration to
be stored. The configuration name
can be changed, if desired.
Send (download) a saved
configuration to connected device.
Selects and compares a device
configuration with another device
configuration.
Save as . . .


Figure 25 HART
©
5 275 or 375 Communicator Menu Summary
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 56
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
HART
©
6 375 Communicator menu
Figure 26 summarizes the menus available from the “HART
©
Communicator” menu. The “HART
©

Communicator” menu is accessed by backing out (pressing the left arrow on the keypad) from the “Online”
menu.
Ut ilit y
Configure HART Application
Available Device Descriptions
Simulation
Communicator setup and operation
settings.
Please refer to the communicator
product manual or use the online
help f or details on t hese menu
options.
Polling
Ignore Status
HART 6 Tag
Storage cleanup
Specifies storage location (memory)
where you want t he configuration to
be stored. The configuration name
can be changed, if desired.
Send (download) a saved
configuration to connected device.
Select s and compares a device
configuration with another device
configuration.
Edit
Copy t o . . .
Send
Print
Delete
Rename
Compare
I nternal Flash Contents
Configuration EM Contents
HART Diagnosti cs
DC Voltage Measurement
Mark all
Unmark all
Edit individually
HART Communi cator
Offline
Online
Utility
HART Diagnostics
Of f line
New configuration
Saved Configuration
Manuf acturer
Model
Field device rev.
PV unit
PV Damping
PV URV
PV LRV
Transfer function
SV unit
Tag
Long t ag
Date
Descriptor
Message
Final Assy Number
Takes you to HOME menu
See Figure 24.
Save as . . .






Figure 26 HART
©
6 375 Communicator Menu Summary
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
57
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Model 275 Communicator
Figure 27 shows the elements of the Model 275 HART
©
Communicator.


Figure 27 Model 275 HART
©
Communicator
Display
Function keys
Action keys
Alphanumeric keys
Shift keys
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 58
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Model 275 Interface characteristics
Keep in mind the following display-selection descriptions when configuring a transmitter. These selections
are highlighted at the bottom of the display screen, directly above the four function keys at the top of the
communicator’s keypad (F1, F2, F3, and F4). To make desired highlighted selection, press the
corresponding function key.

Function Key Description or Action
HOME Takes you back to the “Online” display.
EXIT Backs you out of the current display.
END Backs you out of one level to the next higher level.
ABORT Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
ESC Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
SEND Downloads the contents of the communicator’s working memory to the
transmitter’s memory. Changes made in the communicator’s working
memory are not transferred to the transmitter until a SEND command is
issued.
If you have not sent the changes and are about to turn off the
communicator, you will receive a prompt warning you that there is unsent
data and asking if you want to send it before shutting off.
NEXT and PREV Allows you to scroll through a list of configured parameters.
ENTER Allows you to choose the highlighted selection or to continue after
performing an action, such as removing the loop from automatic control.
HELP Gives a brief definition/explanation of the current selection or display.
DEL Deletes character directly beneath flashing cursor.


Symbols

Symbol Description or Action

Flashing heart icon in the upper right corner of display screen indicates that
the transmitter and communicator are “talking.”


When this symbol appears on the display screen it indicates that you can
press the left arrow on the keypad to back out to another display.
These arrows appear on the display screen to indicate there is more
information to scroll through, using the indicated arrow on the keypad.
l and/or ¹
This arrow appears on the display screen to indicate that a menu item
contains more information that can be accessed by pressing the right arrow
on the keypad.
¬
[>>>]
This “hot” key on the keypad allows you to access range values (LRV,
URV, LRL, and URL) directly. When finished, you return to the spot from
which you started.



ATTENTION
An alternate way of selecting a menu item, besides using the up and down arrows, is to press
the key corresponding to the number left of the desired menu item.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
59
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Model 375 Communicator
Figure 28 shows the elements of the Model 375 HART
©
Communicator.


Figure 28 Model 375 HART
©
Communicator
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 60
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Model 375 Interface characteristics
The following functions appear onscreen. Tap the display to make a selection.

Touch screen function Description or Action

Flashing heart icon in the center of display screen indicates that the
transmitter and communicator are “talking.”
HOME Takes you back to the “Online” display.
EXIT Backs you out of the current display.
X Closes the current display and returns to main menu.

Backs you out of the current display. You can also press ◄ on the keypad.
>>>
HART
©
5 only. This “hot” key on the keypad allows you to access range
values (LRV, URV, LRL, and URL) directly. When finished, you return to
the spot from which you started.
END Backs you out of one level to the next higher level.
ABORT Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
ESC Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
SEND Downloads the contents of the communicator’s working memory to the
transmitter’s memory. Changes made in the communicator’s working
memory are not transferred to the transmitter until a SEND command is
issued.
If you have not sent the changes and are about to turn off the
communicator, you will receive a prompt warning you that there is unsent
data and asking if you want to send it before shutting off.
NEXT and PREV Allows you to scroll through a list of configured parameters.
ENTER Allows you to choose the highlighted selection or to continue after
performing an action, such as removing the loop from automatic control.
HELP Gives a brief definition/explanation of the current selection or display.
DEL Deletes highlighted text or character to the right of the flashing cursor.
SAVE Allows you to save the current device configuration to Internal Flash or to
Configuration Expansion Module.


ATTENTION

An alternate way of selecting a menu item, besides using the up and down arrows, is to press
the key corresponding to the number left of the desired menu item.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
61
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Making changes with 275 Communicator
When a selection in a list is highlighted (see “PV Damping” display below):
Using arrow keys, scroll through choices until desired selection is highlighted, then press ENTER ([F4]
function key).



ATTENTION
An alternate way of selecting a menu choice is to press the key corresponding to the number
left of the desired menu item. (For example: Pressing “3” would select 0.32 seconds in the PV
Damping display below.)

ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
4.00 s
8.00 s
16.0 s
32.0 s
7
8
9

0.00 s
ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
1.00 s
2.00 s
4.00 s
8.00 s
5
6
7
8

0.00 s
ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
0 s (damping off)
0.16 s
0.32 s
0.48 s
1
2
3
4

0.00 s
22900

When current selection is displayed with the same information repeated and highlighted directly beneath it
(see “URV” display below):
Using keypad, key in a new value, then press ENTER ([F4] function key).
ST3000: PT 3011
Pres URV
12.5 inH2O
12.5
HELP DEL ESC ENTER

When keying in alphanumeric characters:
To key in an alpha character or any symbol that appears at the top of a key, first press the arrow key (at
bottom of keypad) indicating the position of that character on the key, then press key. See the example
below to key in the word DATE.
  
+
8
D E F
= D
  
+
7
A B C
= A
  
+
1
S T U
= T
  
+
8
D E F
= E

To key in a numeric character, merely press the key.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 62
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Making changes with Model 375 Communicator
When a selection in a list is highlighted (see “PV Damping” display below):
Using arrow keys, scroll through choices until desired selection is highlighted, then tap ENTER key or
press ENTER key.



ATTENTION
An alternate way of selecting a menu choice is to press the key corresponding to the number
left of the desired menu item. (For example: Pressing “3” would select 0.32 seconds in the PV
Damping display below.)

ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
4.00 s
8.00 s
16.0 s
32.0 s
7
8
9

0.00 s
ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
1.00 s
2.00 s
4.00 s
8.00 s
5
6
7
8

0.00 s
ST3000:HELLO
PV Damping
Select new damping.
ENTER ESC
0 s (damping off)
0.16 s
0.32 s
0.48 s
1
2
3
4

0.00 s
22900

When current selection is displayed with the same information repeated and highlighted directly beneath it
(see “URV” display below):
Using touch screen keys or keypad to key in a new value, then ENTER.
ST3000: PT 3011
Pres URV
12.5 inH2O
12.5
HELP DEL ESC ENTER

When keying in alphanumeric characters:
To key in an alphanumeric character or any symbol that appears at the top of a key, do either of the
following.
- press an alphanumeric key to cycle through its characters. For example, for the letter “V”, press
the TUV8 key three times. Or,
- use the touch screen to enter a new value.
To key in a numeric character, merely press the key.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
63
6— Configuration - Tag— Entering a Tag Number
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 64
Tag— Entering a Tag Number



ATTENTION
If you want to record the configuration data for your transmitter, there is a Configuration
Record Sheet provided in Appendix B.

The procedure in Table 18 shows how to enter a sample tag number of PT 3011 into the transmitter’s
configuration database.
Table 18 Entering Tag Number

Step Action
1 From the “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 At “Device setup” menu, select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “Tag.”
4


When “Tag” display appears, key in tag name (for example: PT 3011) which can be a
maximum of eight characters.
Refer to “Making changes” in the previous section for information on keying in alphanumeric
characters.

5 Press ENTER.
6 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
65
PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement
You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of the pre-programmed engineering
units in the communicator.
The procedure in Table 19 shows how to select the desired pre-programmed engineering units.
Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “PV Unit.”
4 At “Pressure unit” display, scroll through available units listed below.
InH2O psi Pa inH2O @4degC
InHg bar kPa mmH2O @4degC
ftH2O mbar torr inH2O @60degF
mmH2O g/Sqcm atm
mmHg kg/Sqcm MPa
5 When the desired unit is highlighted, press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
6 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.




ATTENTION
Since the engineering units affect the value of LRV and URV, it is recommended that you send
the changed PV unit to the transmitter and then verify and change as required the values of
LRV and URV.

6— Configuration - Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 66
Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values through the communicator keypad or
applying the corresponding LRV and URV pressures directly to the transmitter.
Procedure for keying in LRV and URV
Table 20 gives the procedure for keying in the range values for a sample 5 to 45 inH
2
O range. (If inH
2
O is
not the unit being used, follow the procedure in Table 19 to change it.)



ATTENTION
- ST 3000 Smart Transmitters are factory calibrated with inches of water ranges using inches
of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2˚F (4˚C).
- For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as
the URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 psi range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV
and 0 as the URV.
- When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
- If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.

Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV

Step Action
1 Starting at the “Online” menu, make the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Basic setup
Range values
PV LRV
2 Key in the desired LRV setting (for example: 5).
Press ENTER. This takes you back to “Range values” menu.
3 Choose “PV URV.”
4 Key in the desired URV setting (for example: 45).
Press ENTER.
5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
67
Procedure for setting range values to applied pressure
Table 21 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied pressures.



ATTENTION
- When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
- If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.

Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures

Step Action
1 Starting at the “Online” menu, make the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
2 When the following display appears
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input.
3 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents LRV for 4 mA (0%) output. Press
OK.
4 When the “Current applied process value:” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then
press ENTER. This returns you to display shown in Step 2.
5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input pressure for 20 mA output.
6 Select Exit and press ENTER.
You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.



ATTENTION
You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the new smart meter to set the lower
and upper range values to applied pressures. See Appendix A for the procedure.

6— Configuration - Device Information
Device Information
Device information menu contains important data for device identification, such as transmitter type, device
tag, serial numbers and revision numbers of the transmitter. Some data is fixed and is read only for
identification purposes. Table 22 outlines the steps for accessing data under the device information menu.
Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “Device Information.”
4 At “Device Information” display, scroll through available parameter selections listed below.
Parameter Value
Manufacturer * Honeywell
Model * ST3000
Measurement type * Pressure sensor type (DP, GP, AP)
PROM ID * 10-digit PROM ID number
Tag PT3011 (or enter an 8 character tag name if one is not
shown)
Long Tag 32 character tag name
Configuration Change Counter*** Number of configuration changes made
Date Enter date
Descriptor Up to 8 character description
Message Key in a message (up to 32 characters), if desired.
Write protect ** No (or Yes)
Final assembly number Up to an 8 digit number
Device ID * First 7 characters of PROM ID
Loop Current Mode*** Enable for Analog mode, disable for multi-drop
HART
©
6 HART
©
5/SIL HART
©
5
Revision numbers * Universal rev 6 5 5
Field device rev 4 2 2
Software rev 35 34 33 and below

HART
©
6
Revision numbers**** Universal rev 6
(Advanced Diag Release) Field device rev 5
Software rev 36
Install Date **** 01/01/2009
Model Number(Method)**** Displays the model number of the device.
Example:
Model Number Is: Key number STD120-
Table I is B2A-
Table II is 00000 -
TABLE III is FF, SL, WX,
SH,A2,LT,SS,S4,SB,UM,TP,F3,F6,W4,1C
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 68
6— Configuration - Device Information
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
69
Step Action

Materials Constr **** This is a Method which may be used to translate the
key number, Table I and Table II values of the model
number to determine device type/range, materials of
construction and flange information.
-Show Key Number
-General…
-Special …
-Show flange Assembly Number


-
-
-
This data is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.
** Write protection is selected by changing a jumper on the transmitter PWA. See
Section 8.
*** HART
©
6 only.
****HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev 6,
Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36. For details about these parameters refer to
“Detailed Setup – Device Info” under the “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.
When the desired parameter is highlighted, press right arrow key.
Note: If the parameter value is highlighted with a blinking cursor, the value can be changed.
Enter a new value, if desired and press ENTER.
Note: Pressing ESC will cancel action without changing selection.
5 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - Device Information
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 70
Pressure transfer function— Selecting Output Conformity
Output form options
You can select the transmitter’s output to represent either a straight linear calculation, or a square root
calculation for flow measurement applications using a differential pressure type transmitter. Thus, we refer
to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the output form.
The procedure in Table 23 shows how to select the desired Output conformity.
Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “PV xfer fnctn.”
4 Select either Linear or Square root, then press ENTER.
5 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

About square root output
For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary element, the flow rate is
directly proportional to the square root of the differential or pressure drop. The ST 3000 transmitter’s
output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its output conformity is configured as
square root.
You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes.
(Note: This formula assumes that LRV = 0.)

∆P
Span
• 100 = %P
Where, ∆P = Differential pressure input in engineering units
Span = Transmitter’s measurement span (URV – LRV)
%P = Pressure input in percent of span
Therefore,
%P
100
• 100 = % Flow
And, you can use this formula to determine the corresponding current output in milliamperes direct current.
(% Flow • 16 mA) + 4 mA = mA dc Output
6— Configuration - Device Information
EXAMPLE: If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0 to 100 inches of water
with an input of 49 inches of water, substituting into the previous formulas yields:

49
100
• 100 = 49%
49%
100
• 100 = 70% Flow, and
70% • 16 + 4 = 15.2 mA dc Output
Square root dropout
To avoid unstable output at readings near zero, the ST 3000 transmitter automatically drops square root
conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings. As shown in Figure 29,
the point is near 0.5% of input for ST 3000 transmitters.

0 0.2 0.4 0.8 1 0.6 1.2 1.4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
Differential Pressure (% Full Scale)
Flow
(% of Span)
0utput
(mA dc)
4
4.8
5.6
6.4
Dropout Points
S
q
u
a
r
e

R
o
o
t

C
u
r
v
e


Figure 29 Square Root Dropout Point
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
71
6— Configuration - PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 72
PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time
You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We suggest that you set the damping to the
smallest value that the system can accept.



ATTENTION
The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the turndown ratio of the
transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the peak-to-peak noise on the output signal
increases. You can use this formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for
your transmitter.
Turndown Ratio =
Upper Range Limit
(Upper Range Value – Lower Range Value)


EXAMPLE: The turndown ratio for a 400 inH
2
O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 inH
2
O would be:
Turndown Ratio =
400
(50 – 0)
=
8
1
or 8:1
The procedure in Table 24 outlines how to adjust the damping time.
Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “PV Damp.”
4 At “PV Damping” display, scroll through selections until desired value is highlighted. Press
ENTER.
The damping values are set at:
0.00 s, 0.16 s, 0.32 s, 0.48 s, 1.00 s,
2.00 s, 4.00 s, 8.00 s, 16.0 s, 32.0 seconds.
If you do not want to change the damping value, press ABORT.
5 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
73
SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units
You can select the temperature units for display of the secondary variable, which is the meter body
temperature.
Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “SV Unit.”
4 Scroll down to highlight the desired temperature units:
degC degF degR Kelvin
5 When the desired selection is highlighted, press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
6 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 74
Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address
You can select the poll address for the transmitter that determines certain communications characteristics.
HART
©
communications protocol provides for communications to multiple HART
©
devices connected on
the same loop (multidrop mode). In a multidrop mode, each device in the loop must be given a unique
address.
For HART
©
5, a device with a poll address of 1 through 15 is identified as being in multidrop mode.
Communication between the communicator and the devices takes place digitally, with the analog output
remaining constant (fixed at 4 mA average).
A device with a poll address of 0 (zero) will provide a 4 to 20 mA analog output as well as receive
requests and respond to commands from the HART
©
communicator.
For HART
©
6, analog output mode is a separate menu item (Loop Current Mode). Poll Addresses may be
set from 0 to 63.
The steps in Table 26 show how set the poll address of the transmitter. ST 3000 transmitters are shipped
from the factory with poll address 0.

Table 26 Selecting Poll Address

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Detailed setup.”
3 Select “Output condition.”
4 Select “HART
©
output.”
5 Press the right arrow key to change “Poll addr” for transmitter.
For HART
©
5:
-
-
-
Key in address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog mode.
- Key in address from 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating an a multidrop mode.
For HART
©
6:
Key in address from 0 to 63.
6 HART
©
6 models only:
Scroll to Loop Curnt Mode. Select whether to Enable or Disable analog mode.
7 Press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
8 Either:
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

6— Configuration - Install Date – Enter Install Date
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
75
Install Date – Enter Install Date
This option exists only for HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release” with the Universal Rev
6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36.
For more details, refer to “Basic Setup – Device Information” under the “Advanced Diagnostics for ST
3000 Release” topic.

The Install Date represents the date of installation of the device at the user’s site. The user enters a date
once during device lifetime. Once the date has been entered, no further updates are possible. The value is
permanently saved and becomes accessible as a read-only parameter for reference.
The steps in Table 27 show how to enter the Installation Date. ST 3000 transmitters are shipped from
the factory with Install Date initialized to 01/01/1999.

Table 27 Entering Installation Date

Step Action
1 From “Online” menu, select “Device setup.”
2 Select “Basic setup.”
3 Select “Device Information.”
4 Select “Install Date.”
5 Enter the actual date of installation in the following format:
MM/DD/YYYY: where MM is month, DD is day, YYYY is the year.
7 Press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
8 Either:
-
-
press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
go to another procedure and continue making changes.

Disconnecting the Communicator
Disconnection checklist
Do the following steps before disconnecting the communicator:
- Make sure the transmitter is not in the current output mode.
- Download all configuration database changes to the transmitter’s memory by selecting SEND.

7— Start-up - Overview
7— Start-up
Overview
About this section
This section identifies typical start-up tasks associated with several generic pressure measurement
applications. It also includes the procedure for running an optional analog output check.
This section includes these topics.
Performing an analog output check
Start up procedures for the different types of pressure transmitters in various applications, such as
DP transmitter in a flow measurement
DP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter in a liquid level measurement applications
GP transmitter in pressure or liquid level measurement applications
AP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application


ATTENTION

All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 76
7— Start-up - Start-up Tasks
Start-up Tasks
About start-up
Once you have installed and configured a transmitter, you are ready to start up the process loop. Start-up
usually includes
- Applying process pressure to the transmitter,
- Checking zero input, and
- Reading input and output.
You can also run an optional output check to “wring out” an analog loop prior to start-up.
Procedure reference
The actual steps in a start-up procedure will vary based on the type of transmitter and the measurement
application. In general, you use the communicator to check the transmitter’s input and output under static
process conditions, and make adjustments as required, before putting the transmitter into full operation with
the running process.
Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table 28 based on your type of
transmitter and the measurement application. The reference procedure will give you some idea of the
typical tasks associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application.
Table 28 Start-up Procedure Reference

IF transmitter type is ... AND application is ... THEN reference procedure
in ...
Differential Pressure (DP) Flow Measurement Table 30
Pressure Measurement Table 31
Liquid Level Measurement for
Vented Tank with Dry Reference
Leg*
Table 32
Liquid Level Measurement for
Pressurized Tank with Liquid-Filled
Reference Leg*
Table 33
Gauge Pressure (GP) Pressure or Liquid Level
Measurement**
Table 34
Pressure Measurement** Absolute Pressure (AP) Table 35
DP with Remote Seals Liquid Level Measurement Table 36

* These applications also apply for flange-mounted liquid level type transmitters that are usually
mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank.
** These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote seals.
However, you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter output in processes using
remote seal connections.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
77
7— Start-up - Running Analog Output
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 78
Running Analog Output
Background
You can put the transmitter into a constant-current source mode to check out other instruments in the loop
such as recorders, controllers, and positioners. Using the communicator, you can tell the transmitter to
change its output to any value between 4 mA (1V or 0%) and 20 mA (5V or 100%) and maintain that
output. This makes it easy to verify loop operation through the accurate simulation of transmitter output
signals before bringing the loop on line. Note that the constant-current source mode is also referred to as
the output mode.



ATTENTION
The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it is in the constant-
current source mode.

Procedure
The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in the constant current source mode.
Table 29 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on. If possible, locate communicator
where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If you want to verify loop
calibration, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2 From the “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections by highlighting and
pressing the right arrow key:
- Device setup
- Diag/Service
-
-
-
-
Loop test
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
3 At the “Choose analog output level” display, select 4mA to set the output signal level to 4 mA
(1.0V or 0%).
Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitter’s output is fixed at 4 mA.
4 Check that receiving device indication is at its 0% point. If applicable, check that milliammeter
reading is 4 mA or voltmeter reading is 1.0V.
If indication is inaccurate, check the calibration of receiving device.
Use the transmitter output as a calibration input source for instruments in the loop.
If you want to choose a 20 mA output value, then press OK and go to Step 5.
If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.
If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.
5 Select 20mA to set output signal to 20 mA (5.0V or 100%).
Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitter ‘s output is fixed at 20 mA.
7— Start-up - Running Analog Output
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
79
Step Action
6 Check that receiving device indication is at its 100% point. If applicable, check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA or voltmeter reading is 5.0V.
-
-
If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.
If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.
7 Select Other and press ENTER, then use communicator’s keyboard to enter other values.
For example, Transmitter output PV in % Communicator keystrokes
If you want an output of: 8.0 mA 2.0V 25% press 8 and ENTER.
8.8 mA 2.2V 30% press 8.8 and ENTER.
12.0 mA 3.0V 50% press 12 and ENTER.
16.0 mA 4.0V 75% press 16 and ENTER.
The communicator notifies you that the transmitter’s output is fixed at that value.
When you have completed the loop test, press OK and go to Step 8.
8 Select “End” and press ENTER. The communicator will notify you that it is returning the
transmitter to its original output.
A screen will prompt you to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

Di fferenti al
Pressure
Transmi tter
-
+
-
+
+

-
250 O
Voltmeter
Power
Supply
Field
Terminals
Receiver
Red +
Black -
Precision
Milliammeter
HART hand-hel d
Commni cator
HP
LP
Note: Polarity of the Communicator
connection does not matter.


Figure 30 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source
(Output) Mode
7— Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid flow measurement application. Refer to Figure 31 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

HP
LP
LP Blockoff
Plug G
Plug F
Valve A
Valve B
Valve C
HP Blockoff
Di fferenti al
Pressure
Transmi tter


Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter




ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 30, we are assuming that all the valves on the three-valve manifold
and the block-off valves were closed at installation.




Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 80
7— Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
81
Step Action
2 Open equalizer valve C.
Refer to Figure 28 for sample piping arrangement.
3 Open valves A and HP block-off to make differential pressure zero (0) by applying same
pressure to both sides of meter body.
Allow system to stabilize at full static pressure—zero differential.
4 At the “Online” menu, read the applied input pressure (PV).
Also check that the PV analog output displays a corresponding zero input pressure.
5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
If communicator and milliammeter readings are…
- exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 9.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
not exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 6.
6 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Zero trim
7 Under “Zero trim” do the following when prompted:
Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.
Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.
Press OK when “Apply 0 input to sensor.” display appears.
You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.
8 Press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9 Close equalizer valve C.
10 Open valve B and LP block-off valve to begin measuring process differential pressure.
11 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied input pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if necessary.
If device is not “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” skip to step 16.
12* On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date”, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter
13* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Step Action
14* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field)”, enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter
15* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field)”, enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter
16 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.
17 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
*HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to “Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records” under the
“Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.


Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 31 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 32 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.



Valve D
Valve A
Plug C
LP Vent
HP Vent
HP side
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
LP side
H


Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 82
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
83


Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2 Close valve D.
Refer to Figure 32 for sample piping arrangement.
3 Open plug C and valve A to apply head pressure H to meter body. Then, open LP vent.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure
4 At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
5 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue
6 When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
7 When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9 Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
10 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
11 At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding zero line pressure plus head
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Step Action
pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12 Close plug C
13 Open valve D to begin measuring process line pressure.
14 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied line pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
15 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 84
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 32 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a vented tank with a dry reference leg. Refer to Figure 33 for the
piping arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

Valve A
Plug C
LP Vent
Tap location at
the minimum level
to be measured
To HP connection
on meter body
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
H


Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Vented Tank



ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 31, we are assuming that the tank is empty and the piping
arrangement includes a block-off valve.

Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2 Close block-off valve A.
Refer to Figure 33 for sample piping arrangement.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
85
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 86
Step Action
3 Open plug C.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.
4 At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
5 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
6 When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
7 When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9 Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
10 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
11 At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12 Close plug C.
13 Open valve A to begin measuring tank pressure. Leave LP side vented to atmosphere.




ATTENTION
If the URV was calculated on the approximate density of the liquid and/or tank height, the
exact URV can be set by filling the tank to the desired full scale level and then setting the URV
through the communicator. See Range Values in Section 6 for details.


7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
Step Action
14 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied tank level pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.
15 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a pressurized tank with a liquid-filled (wet) reference leg. Refer to
Figure 34 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter
connections.

Valve A
Plug C at
zero level
Tap location at the
minimum level to be
measured
HP side of transmitter
Differential
Pressure
Transmi tter
h
H
1
Valve B Plug D


Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Pressurized Tank.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
87
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 88



ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 33, we are assuming:
- The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled.
- The high pressure (HP) side of the transmitter is connected to the wet reference leg. Note
that the transmitter will work if the HP side is connected to the bottom of the tank, but not
within the guaranteed accuracy specifications.
- The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank, so “h” is greater than zero. If h
equals zero, plug C is eliminated from the piping and the LP vent is opened instead.



Table 33 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2 Close block-off valves A and B.
Refer to Figure 34 for sample piping arrangement.
3 Open plugs C and D.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.
4 At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
5 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
6 When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
89
Step Action
7 When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8 When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9 Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
10 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
11 At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H
1
. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12 If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 13
If you can fill tank to desired full-scale level, then go to Step 14
13 Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 24
14 Close plugs C and D.
15 Open valves A and B. Fill tank to desired full scale level.
16 At “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), read present URV setting.
17 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
18 When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 20mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 20 mA input. Press OK.
19 When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 20mA value” then
press ENTER.

7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 90
Step Action
20 When the display in Step 18 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
21 Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
22 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
23 At “Process variables” display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank pressure applied.
Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.
24




Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.
Ranging the transmitter in this way makes it reverse acting.
25 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 34 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure (GP) type transmitter in a
pressure or liquid level measurement application. Refer to Figure 35 and Figure 36 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections..

Block-off
valve no.2
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Union
Block-off
valve no.1
Pipe
Plug
Process
Tee connector


Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter
7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
91
Tap location at the minimum
level to be measured
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Block-off
valve
To Process Head
connection on
meter body


Figure 36 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter.



ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 34, we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block-off
valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not include a Tee-connector, you can only
verify that the input and output readings correlate.

Table 34 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2 Close block-off valve.
Refer to Figure 35 or Figure 36 for sample piping arrangement.
3 Remove plug from Tee-connector to vent it to atmosphere, if applicable.
Allow system to stabilize at static pressure.
4 At “Online” menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
5
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, step through the following menu
selections:
- Device setup
- Process variables
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding input pressure. Check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output
7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 92
Step Action
6 If communicator and milliammeter readings are zero (4 mA), then go to Step 9.
If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is level with
transmitter, then go to Step 7
If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is above
transmitter, then go to Step 8
7 From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Zero trim
Under “Zero trim” do the following when prompted:
Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.
Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.
Press OK when “Apply 0 input to sensor.” display appears.
You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.
Go to Step 9.
8
















From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
- Device setup
- Diag/Service
- Calibration
- Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP
Step Action
8,
cont’d
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9 Close Tee-connector and slowly open block-off valve to apply process pressure to transmitter.
10 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
If device is not “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” skip to step 15.
11* On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date”, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter
12* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter
13* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field)”, enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter
14* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field)”, enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter
15 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.
16 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

Pressure Measurement with AP
Procedure
The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute pressure (AP). type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 37 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.



February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
93
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP
Shut-off
valve no.2
Absolute
Pressure
Transmitter
Union
Shut-off
valve no.1
Pipe
Plug
Process Tee connector
For additional overrrange protection, use
Sprague engineering type gauge saver or
Fairchild model 95 gauge guard (style 1)


Figure 37 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type
Transmitter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 94
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
95



ATTENTION
For AP transmitters, you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate.


Table 35 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement.
Step
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop.
2 Set process pressure to zero level, if possible.
Allow system to stabilize at zero pressure.
3 At “Online” menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero level.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
4
Optional (read output in % of range):
Read barometric pressure and confirm with local source, (for example, weather station, airport,
or other reference).
5 From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
6 At “Process variables” display, read output. Compare local reference pressure with transmitter
in % of span. Check that milliammeter reading corresponds to output.
7 Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
8 Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.

7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Procedure
The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter
with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application.. Refer to Figure 38 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 30 for typical communicator and meter connections.

Differential
Pressure
Transmitter with
remote seal s
LP Side
HP Side
H2
Fixed
Ref. Leg
Zero Level (empty)
Full Level
Variable
Head H1


Figure 38 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter with Remote Seals



ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 36, we are assuming that
- The tank is empty and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions.
- The DP transmitter has its high pressure (HP) side connected to the tank’s lower flange and
low pressure (LP) side connected to the upper flange.

Table 36 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 96
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
97
Step Action
2 -
-
If you cannot empty tank, then go to Step 3.
If you can empty tank, then go Step 4.
3 Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank pressure. See Section 6.7 in this manual for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 7.
You can use this formula to calculate LRV in inH
2
O.
LRV = (H2 x S
f
) x –1
H2 = Height of fixed reference leg in inches.
S
f
= Specific gravity of remote seal fill fluid.
The LRV calculation must be multiplied by –1 since pressure in on the low side of the meter
body.
EXAMPLE: If H2 equaled 12 feet and the fill fluid was silicone oil, substituting into the formula
yields: LRV = (12 ft x 12 in x 0.94) x –1
LRV = –135.36 inH
2
O



ATTENTION
The specific gravity of silicone oil fill fluid (DC200) is 0.94 and fluorolube fill fluid (CTFE) is
1.84.
4 If applicable, press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Step through the following menu
selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER. LRV is set to fixed reference leg pressure H2 times density of remote seal fill fluid
multiplied by –1 (pressure on low side of meter body).
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Step Action
5 Press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Read applied input pressure (PV) which should be
zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
6
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, step through the following menu
selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Process variables
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
reference pressure H2. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
7 If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 8.
If you can fill tank, then go Step 9.
8 Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range Values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 12.
You can use these formulas to calculate URV in inH
2
O.
Span = H1 x S
L

H1 = Height of variable head in inches.
S
L
= Specific gravity of measured liquid.
URV = Span + LRV
EXAMPLE: If H1 equaled 10 feet, the measured liquid was water, and the LRV equaled –
135.36 inH
2
O; substituting into the formulas yields:
Span = 10 ft x 12 in x 1.00
Span = 120 inH
2
O
URV = 120 inH
2
O + –135.36 inH
2
O
URV = –15.36 inH
2
O


ATTENTION
The specific gravity of water at 60°F (15.6°C) is 1.00.
9









From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
-
-
-
-

Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 98
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
99
Step Action
9,
cont’d
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1 4mA
2 20mA
ABORT ENTER
3 Exit

choose 20mA, then press ENTER.
w 20 mA input. Press OK.
“Set as 20mA value” then
ER.
10 With full tank pressure applied, read PV analog
11
p through the following menu
tup
- les
At display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank. Check that
12 to check that output signal does correspond to
heck that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
s are still not correct, verify
13

A display will prompt you to apply ne
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose
press ENTER. URV is set to full tank pressure.
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENT
Return the loop to automatic control.
Press HOME to return to “Online” menu.
output which should be 20 mA to correspond with 100% output.
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, ste
selections:
- Device se
Process variab
“Process variables”
milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.
Take communicator and milliammeter readings
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, c
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If reading
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
8— Operation - Introduction
8— Operation
Introduction
About this section
This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the operation of an ST 3000 transmitter.
It also includes procedures for:
changing the default failsafe direction of the transmitter’s output,
changing the read/write access of the transmitter’s configuration database, and
saving and/or restoring a transmitter’s configuration database.
Accessing Operation Data
Summary
You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter using a hand-held communicator.

Input
Output in % or milliamperes
Upper and Lower Range Limits
Status
Failsafe Output Direction
Sensor Temperature
Messages
Table 37 summarizes the steps required to access given operation data from the transmitter. These steps
assume that communicator communications have been established with the transmitter. All steps start at the
“Online” (or HOME) display. The values shown in displays are for example purposes only.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
101
8— Operation - Accessing Operation Data
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 102
Table 37 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access

What you want to view What to do
Present input pressure. Read PV from “Online” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
3
4
5
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
1
2
Device setup
PV

You may need to select PV and press the right
arrow key to view PV value.(See Note.)

Present transmitter output in percent. Select: Device setup
Process variables
Read Pres % rnge from “Process variables”
display.

*HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics For ST
3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev
6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36
** Future Feature to be added for DP meter
body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and
GP type meter bodies.
For more details, refer to “Process Variables
Parameters” under the “Advanced
Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.

ST3000: PT 3011
Process variables
3
4
5*
6**
AO
SV
Electronics Temperature
Static Pressure
11.992mA
23.50
20.69

degC
degC


1
2
Pres
% rnge
–0.00745 inH2O
49.95%
HELP HOME
14.50 psi
8— Operation - Accessing Operation Data

Present transmitter output in milliamperes. Read PV AO from “Online” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
3
4
5
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
1
2
Device setup
PV


Upper and Lower Range Limits of the transmitter.









Select: Device Setup
Basic Setup
Range Values

Read PV LRL and PV URL from “Range values”
display.

You may need to select PV LRL and PV URL and
press the right arrow key to view the values. (See
Note.)
*only available on HART
©
6 release transmitters

Status of transmitter operation at the present
time.
Select: Device setup
Diag/Service
Device status
Select either “Critical” or “Non-Critical” from the
“Device status” display.
Additionally, an “Info” category is available for
“Advanced Diagnostics Release for ST 3000”
only.
Warnings, status messages, and error messages
appear on screen as necessary. Refer to Section
11 in this manual for further information.
HELP
ST3000: PT 3011
Range values
3
4
5*
6*
PV LRL
PV URL
PV LTL
PV UTL
0.00 inH2O
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
PV LRV
PV URV
1
2
400.7 inH2O
-800.14 inH20
800.12 inH20
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
103
8— Operation - Accessing Operation Data

Present failsafe output direction, which depends
on the position of the internal failure mode alarm
jumper.
Select: Device setup
Detailed setup
Output condition
Analog output
Read AO Alrm typ from “Analog output” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Analog output
3
4
Loop test
D/A trim
1
2
AO
AO Alrm typ
11.990 mA
Hi
HELP
5 Scaled D/A trim
HOME

Present sensor temperature (±5°C) measured by
circuitry in the transmitter’s sensor.
Choose: Device setup
Detailed setup
Sensors
Read SV from “Sensors” display
ST3000: PT 3011
Sensors
3
4
Sensor information
SV
1
2
PV
PV unit
-0.0134 inH2O
inH2O
HELP
5 SV unit
HOME
23.42 degC
degC

Present information in the message (or
scratchpad) area.
Choose: Device setup
Basic setup
Device information
Message
Read present information in “Message” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Message
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HELP ESC DEL ENTER
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98


Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be visible in some displays, (due to the limitations
of the communicator display). To view these values you must use the down arrow key to select the
value and then press the right arrow key to display the value in detail.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 104
8— Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers

Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers
Default failsafe direction
Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the transmitter’s
output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
The upscale failsafe action will drive an analog transmitter’s output to 20.8 mA or a downscale action will
drive its output to 3.8 mA.
The HART
©
communicator parameter PV AO Alrm Typ identifies the failsafe direction of the transmitter.
The parameter indicates failsafe action as either Hi (upscale) or Lo (downscale).
Write protect option
Transmitters are shipped with a default jumper position for read and write access. This means that the
transmitter’s configuration database can be overwritten.
Procedure
The procedure in outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe jumper and/or repositioning the write protect
jumper on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA). Figure 39 shows the location of the jumpers
on the PWA of ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters.


ESD HAZARD
The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter’s PWA makes it susceptible to
damage by stray static discharges when it is removed from the transmitter. Follow these tips to
minimize chances of static electricity damage when handling the PWA.

- Never touch terminals, connectors, component leads, or circuits when handling the PWA.
- When removing or installing the PWA, hold it by its edges or mounting bracket only. If you
must touch the PWA circuits, be sure you are grounded by staying in contact with a
grounded surface or wearing a grounded wrist strap.
- As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter, put it in an electrically conductive bag
or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
105
8— Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers

Figure 39 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA


Table 38 Changing Default Failsafe Direction

Step Action
1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side
of transmitter housing.
2 If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to remove it
from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly.
3 Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing.
Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from PWA,
and remove PWA. See figure.
Connectors
Retaining Clip
PWA
Electronics
Housing




ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 106
8— Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
107



ATTENTION
The PWA board has components on both sides. The failsafe jumper is located on the side with
the most components, which is also the same side as the flex tape and power connector pins.

4 With the PWA component side (from which you unplugged the flex tape and power
connectors) facing you and referring to Figure 39, locate
- Failsafe jumper (W1).
If you want to change the failsafe action from upscale to downscale, cut jumper in half with
a small wire cutter.
5 Reverse steps 2 and 3 to reassemble mounting bracket and PWA in transmitter housing.



ATTENTION
Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.

6 We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
7 Turn ON transmitter power.

Table 39 Changing Write Protect Jumper

Step Action
1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side
of transmitter housing.
2 If equipped with a smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to remove it from
PWA mounting bracket. Move the smart meter to one side in order to gain access to the write
protect jumper. Refer to Figure 39.
3 Reposition the write protect jumper as required. See Figure 36 for jumper positions.
4 Reverse step 2 to reassemble smart meter if applicable.


ATTENTION
Be sure to locate smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the
meter mounting in 90 degree increments.
5 We recommend that you lubricate end cap O-ring with silicone grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
6 Replace end cap.

8— Operation - Writing Data in the Message Area
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 108
Writing Data in the Message Area
The message area is a 32-character field containing such information as transmitter location, service,
record, scratchpad, etc. This data can be entered using the communicator.
The procedure in Table 40 outlines the steps for entering a sample message. This procedure assumes that
communicator communications have been established with the transmitter.
Table 40 Writing Data in the Message Area

Step Action
1 Starting at the “Online” menu, choose (by highlighting and pressing the right arrow key) the
following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Basic setup
Device information
Message
A display similar to the one below will appear.
ST3000: PT 3011
Message
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HELP ESC DEL ENTER
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98

2 Using the alphanumeric keypad, enter desired message. What you are entering will overwrite
the previous message in the highlighted area. If you make a mistake, press DEL to delete
character beneath blinking cursor.
Refer to “Making changes” in Section 6 for information on using the alphanumeric keypad and
alpha position indicator arrow keys.
3 Press ENTER to save data in message area. (If you press ESC, you will exit message area
without saving change.)
4 When all desired changes have been made, press SEND to download changes from the
communicator memory to the transmitter.

8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Background
If it ever becomes necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a spare, you can save the configuration
database from the damaged transmitter to the memory module or data pack installed in the communicator,
then restore (or send) the saved configuration database from that memory to the spare transmitter. In fact,
you can restore the saved configuration database in any number of transmitters as long as you change the
tag number (ID) in the restored database.
Figure 40 shows a graphic summary of the save and restore database function.
SEND
Communicator
Memory Module
or
Data Pack
ST 3000
Pressure unit
Pres damp
Pres URV
Pres LRV
Pres xfer fnctn
Temp unit
Tag
Message
inH2O
0.48 s
400 inH2O
0 inH2O
Linear
degC
PT3011
Tank Pressure
Saved Configuration Database
ST 3000
Working
Memory
Restored Configuration Database
SAVE
Working
Memory
Pressure unit
Pres damp
Pres URV
Pres LRV
Pres xfer fnctn
Temp unit
Tag
Message
inH2O
0.48 s
400 inH2O
0 inH2O
Linear
degC
PT3011
Tank Pressure

Figure 40 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
109
8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Procedures
The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for saving a configuration database from a transmitter.
Table 42 provides the procedure for downloading (sending) a saved configuration database to a transmitter.
Table 41 Saving a Configuration Database

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring for transmitter with configuration database to be
saved and turn it on.
2 Starting at the “Online” menu, choose SAVE. The Save as . . . screen will appear.
ST3000:PT 3011
Save as . . .
2
3 Data Type Standard
HELP SAVE
1 Location Module
Name

3 Select Location and choose the memory location where you want to save the transmitter
configuration, (Module, data pack or PC, if available). Press ENTER.
4 Select Name and type in the name of the configuration file. Press ENTER.
5 Select Data Type and choose either Standard or Full (for PC). Press ENTER.
6 Press SAVE. A prompt may say that some variables in this configuration were not marked
because they were not read. Press OK.
A prompt may ask if you want to overwrite the existing configuration memory.
Press YES or NO.
The Online screen will appear when save is completed.
7 Disconnect communicator from transmitter loop wiring and turn communicator off.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 110
8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Table 42 Downloading a Configuration Database

Step Action
1 Connect communicator to loop wiring for transmitter whose database is to be restored and turn
it on.
2 Back out to “Offline” display, select Saved Configuration to show the following display.
HART Communicator
Saved Configuration
2
3
data pack Contents
PC
1 Module Contents
HELP

3 Select the memory location of the saved configuration file and press the right arrow key.
4 Select the file name of the saved configuration. Press the right arrow key.
5 The Saved configuration display appears.
HART Communicator
Saved Configuration
1
2
3
Edit
Copy to . . .
Send
HELP
4
5
Print
Delete

Select “Send” and press right arrow key.
When prompted to put loop into manual, press OK.
The selected configuration is downloaded (sent) to the transmitter’s memory.
6 Back out to “Offline” display, then choose Online. You can now change the tag number and
other configuration data, as required.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
111
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Introduction
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about the Advanced Diagnostic features added to the ST 3000 Device.
Advanced Diagnostic features are available with ST 3000 HART
©
6.x firmware revision 3.6 and later.
Advanced Diagnostics are not available in ST 3000 HART
©
5.x devices
Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

What you want to view What to do
Power up Diagnostics
Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics
Select Online\Device
Operating Voltage Diagnostics
Process Variable Tracking Diagnostics
Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics
Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics

Setup\Diagnostics/Service\Advanced Diagnostics

Power Up Diagnostics
Description Total number of power-ups experienced by
the unit.
Set-up None – initialized to zero prior to leaving
factory.
Power fail count Parameter
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period– see note
2.
Note Only one power failure in each 24 hour period
is counted.
Description Displays time since last power-up in minutes. Method
Set-up None.
Time since last
power fail
NVM None – timer is restarted each power-up.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 112
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics
Electronics Temperature Tracking Diagnostics


Maximum Electronics Temperature Tracking
ET (Electronics Temperature upper operating limit from specification. Description
Units are same degree units as has been selected for SV (Secondary
Variable).
Max ET Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
Description Actual limit used in “Time Above Limit” and “Time Since Last Event”.
Value is equal to “Max ET Limit” less 10% of range limits.
Example
ET Upper
Stress Limit

ET range is -40°F to 185°F for a total of 225°F.
“ET Upper Stress Limit”
= 185°F - 10% of 225°F = 162.5°F.
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Description Highest ET ever experienced by the device.
Units are same degree units as has been selected for SV (Secondary
Variable).
Set-up None.
Max ET Value Parameter
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.5°C.
Description Accumulation of minutes that device’s ET has been above the value
of “ET Upper Stress Limit”.
Parameter Time Above
Limit
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time device’s ET has passed
above the value of “ET Upper Stress Limit” (in days, hours and
minutes).
Set-up None.
Method Time Since
Last Event
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
113
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Minimum Electronics Temperature Tracking
Description ET (Electronics Temperature) lower operating
limit from specification.
Units are same degree units as has been
selected for SV (Secondary Variable).
Min ET Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
Description Actual limit used in “Time Below Limit” and
“Time Since Last Event”. Value is equal to
“Min ET Limit” plus 10% of range limits.
Example
ET Lower Stress
Limit

ET range is -40°C to 85°C for a total of 125°C.
“ET Lower Stress Limit”
= -40°C + 10% of 125°C = -27.5°C.
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Description Lowest ET ever experienced by the device.
Units are same degree units as has been
selected for SV (Secondary Variable).
Set-up None.
Min ET Value Parameter
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.5°C.
Description Accumulation of minutes that device’s ET has
been below the value of “ET Lower Stress
Limit”.
Time Below Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time
device’s ET has passed below the value of “ET
Lower Stress Limit” (in days, hours, and
minutes).
Method Time Since Last
Event
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 114
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics
Operating Voltage Diagnostics
Description Supply operating voltage available at device
terminals.
Set-up None – units always in volts.
Current Op Voltage Parameter
NVM None.
No accuracy is specified for this
measurement!
Note
This value is intended to be used for
informational purposes only and should
not be used for control.
Description Minimum operating voltage experienced by
device at terminals since last reset of
operating voltage parameters.
Min Op Voltage Parameter
Set-up User can reset as desired using method
described in item below.
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.125
volts.
Description Displays time since last minimum operating
voltage event in minutes.
Set-up User can reset as desired using method
described in item below.
Time Since Last
Event
Method
NVM Update only if “Min OP Voltage” changes by
greater than 0.125 volts.

Description Causes “Min Op Voltage” to be set to 32 volts
and “Time Since Last Event” to be reset to
zero. Within a short period of time “Min Op
Voltage” will assume operating voltage value.
Method Reset Operating
Voltage
Parameters
Set-up User actuates as desired.
Description Status bit #01 of MISC STATUSES is set if
operating voltage available at screw terminals
is less than 10V.
Low operating
voltage warning
Status
Set-up None.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
115
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics
PV Tracking Diagnostics
Maximum PV (Pressure) Tracking
Description Pressure upper operating limit from specification
in units as selected by user for PV. (Upper
Transducer Limit).
UTL
(Max PV Limit)
Parameter
Set-up None.
Description for DP
type

Actual limit value used in “Time Above Limit” and
“Time Since Last Event”. Value is equal to “PV
Upper Stress Limit” less 10% of range limits.
Method PV Upper Stress
Limit
For STD120 span is 0 to 400 inH2O. Example for DP
Type
Range is 400 inH2O settable within
LTL = -800 inH2O to UTL = 800 inH2O limits.
“PV Upper Stress Limit” =
800 inH2O - 160 inH2O = 640 inH2O.
Example for AP and
GP Types
For STA140 allowable working pressure is 0 to
500 psia.
Withstand Pressure from LTL = 0 to UTL = 750
psia.
“PV Upper Stress Limit” = 750 psia – 75 psia =
675 psia.
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Description Maximum PV that the device has experienced in
user selected units.
Max PV Value Parameter
Set-up None. Value initialized to Min PV Limit value
prior to leaving the factory. Updates to current
PV automatically when powered at user site.
NVM Update only if change greater than 1/8000 of
range.
Description Accumulation of minutes that pressure
measured by the device has been above “PV
Upper Stress Limit”.
Time Above Limit Parameter
Set-up None – initialized to zero prior to leaving the
factory.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time
device’s PV passed above “PV Upper Stress
Limit” (in days, hours and minutes).
Set-up None – initialized to zero prior to leaving the
factory.
Method Time Since Last
Event
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 116
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics

Minimum PV (Pressure) Tracking
Description Pressure lower operating limit from specification in
units selected by user for PV. (Lower Transducer
Limit).
LTL
(Min PV Limit)
Parameter
Set-up None.
Description

Actual limit value used in “Time Below Limit” and “Time
Since Last Event”. Value is equal to “Min PV Limit”
plus 10% of range limits for DP type devices and zero
for GP and AP type devices.
Example for DP Type For STD120 span is 0 to 400 inH2O.
Range is 400 inH2O settable within
LTL = -800 inH2O to UTL = 800 inH2O limits.
“PV Lower Stress Limit” =
-800 inH2O + 160 inH2O = -640 inH2O.
Example for AP and GP
Types
For STA140 allowable working pressure is 0 to 500
psia.
Withstand Pressure from LTL = 0 to UTL = 750 psia.
“PV Lower Stress Limit” = 0 psia.
PV Lower
Stress Limit

Method

Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Description Minimum PV that the device has experienced in user
selected units.
Min PV Value Parameter
Set-up None. Value initialized to Max PV Limit value prior to
leaving the factory. Updates to current PV
automatically when powered at user site.
NVM Update only if change greater than 1/8000 of range.
Description Accumulation of minutes that pressure measured by
the device has been below the value of “PV Lower
Stress Limit”.
Parameter Time Below
Limit
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time device’s PV
passed below the value of “PV Lower Stress Limit” (in
days, hours and mintues).
Method Time Since
Last Event
Set-up None – initialized to zero prior to leaving the factory.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
117
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics
Meter Body Temperature Tracking Diagnostics
Maximum Meter Body Temperature Tracking
(Note that Meter Body temperature is also known as Process temperature or Secondary Variable).
Description MBT upper operating limit from specification. Parameter Max MBT
Limit
Set-up None.
Description Actual limit used in “Time Above Limit” and “Time Since Last Event”.
Value is equal to “Max MBT Limit” less 10% of range limits.
Example MBT range is -40°C to 125°C for a total of 165°C.
“MBT Upper Stress Limit”
= 125°C – 10% of 165°C = 108.5°C.
MBT Upper
Stress Limit
Method
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Description Highest MBT ever experienced by the device. Parameter
Set-up None - value initialized to Min MBT Limit value prior to leaving the
factory. Updates to current MBT automatically when powered at user
site.
Max MBT
Value
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.02°C.
Description Accumulation of minutes that device’s MBT has been above the value of
“MBT Upper Stress Limit”.
Parameter Time Above
Limit
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time device’s MBT has passed
above the value of “MBT Upper Stress Limit” (in days, hours and
minutes).
Set-up None.
Method Time Since
Last Event
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

Minimum Meter Body Temperature Tracking
(Note that Meter Body temperature is also known as Process temperature or Secondary Variable).
Description MBT lower operating limit from specification. Min MBT Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
Description Actual limit used in “Time Below Limit” and “Time Since Last Event”.
Value is equal to “Min MBT Limit” plus 10% of range limits.
Example MBT range is -40°F to 257°F for a total of 297°F.
“MBT Lower Stress Limit”
= -40°F + 10% of 297°F = -10.3°F.
MBT Lower
Stress Limit
Method
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.
Min MBT Parameter Description Lowest MBT ever experienced by the device.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 118
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics
Set-up None - value initialized to Max MBT Limit value prior to leaving the
factory. Updates to current MBT automatically when powered at user
site.
Value
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.02°C.
Description Accumulation of minutes that device’s MBT has been below the value of
“MBT Lower Stress Limit”.
Parameter Time Below
Limit
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time device’s MBT has passed
below the value of “MBT Lower Stress Limit” (in days, hours, and
minutes).
Set-up None.
Method Time Since
Last Event
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics
Static Pressure Limits
Static Pressure upper operating limit specification. Description
Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).
Max SP Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
Static Pressure lower operating limit specification. Description
Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).
Min SP Limit Parameter
Set-up None.
Description Actual limit used in “Time Above Limit” and “Time Since Last Event”.
Value is equal to “Max SP Limit” less 10% of static pressure range
SP Upper
Stress Limit

Example Static Pressure range is 0 to 4500 psi.
“SP Upper Stress Limit”
= 4500 psi - 450 psi = 4050 psi.
Set-up None – calculation is automatic.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
119
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Calibration Records

Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics
Description Highest SP ever experienced by the device.
Units are always PSI (pounds per square inch).
Set-up None.
Max SP
Value
Parameter
NVM Update only if change greater than 0.56 psi.
Description Accumulation of minutes that device’s SP has been above the value of
“SP Upper Stress Limit”.
Parameter Time Above
Limit
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.
Description Time that has passed since the last time device’s SP has passed above
the value of “SP Upper Stress Limit” (in days, hours, and minutes).
Set-up None.
Method Time Since
Last Event
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period – see note 2.

Calibration Records
What you want to view What to do
Select Online\Device Setup\Diag/Service\Calibration Zero Trim Records
Correct LRV Records
Correct URV Records


Zero Trim Records
Description Date and Time of last zero trim field calibration.
(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)
Last Zero Trim Method
Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each zero
trim procedure.
NVM Backup is immediate
Description Date and time of zero trim field calibration that occurred
before the last zero trim field calibration.
See note 1 for format.
Set-up
Previous Zero Trim Method
User is prompted for date and time at end of each zero
trim procedure.
NVM Backup is immediate

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 120
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Calibration Records
Correct LRV Records
Description Date and time of last Correct LRV field calibration.
(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)
Last Correct LRV Method
Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each
Correct LRV procedure.
NVM Backup is immediate
Description Date and time of correct LRV field calibration that
occurred before the last correct LRV field calibration.
See note 1 for format.
Set-up
Method Previous Correct
LRV
User is prompted for date and time at end of each
correct LRV procedure.
NVM Backup is immediate

Correct URV Records
Description Date and time of last correct URV field calibration.
(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)
Last Correct URV Method
Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each
correct URV procedure.
NVM Backup is immediate
Description Date and time of correct URV field calibration that
occurred before the last correct URV field calibration.
(Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format)
Set-up User is prompted for date and time at end of each
correct URV procedure.
Method Previous Correct
URV
NVM Backup is immediate

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
121
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Process Variables Parameters
Process Variables Parameters
What you want to view What to do
Electronics Temperature
Static Pressure

Select Online\Device Setup\Process Variables
Electronics Temperature
Description Temperature inside the electronics housing.
Set-up None – units same as for SV (Secondary Variable).
Electronics
Temperature
Parameter
Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement! It is
certainly less than the accuracy for SV or meter body
temperature.
This value is intended to be used for informational
purposes only and should not be used for control.

Static Pressure
Description Working pressure also known as pressure on high
side of the device for DP (Differential Pressure)
devices.
SP value for AP (Absolute Pressure) or GP (Guage
Pressure) type devices is always 0.
Static
Pressure**
Parameter
None - Units are always psi (pounds per square inch). Set-up
Note No accuracy is specified for this measurement!
It is certainly less than the accuracy for PV.
This value is intended to be used for informational
purposes only and should not be used for control.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 122
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Basic Setup – Device Info
Basic Setup – Device Info
What you want to view What to do
Install Date
Model Number
Materials Constr


Select Online\Device Setup\Basic Setup\Device
Information

Install Date
Description Date of device installation. Install Date Parameter
Set-up User enters a date once during device lifetime. Once
date is entered no further updates are possible and
value becomes read only and is permanently saved.
NVM Backup is immediate.
Note Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year

Model Number
Description Retrieve and display device model number information.
Includes Key Number, Table I, Table II and Table III.
Model Number Method
Set-up None – data preloaded at the factory.

Materials of Construction
Description Translates user supplied Key Number and Table I
portions of model number into information on device
type, range, and materials of contruction
Method Show Key
Number
Set-up User selects appropriate Key Number and Table I
portions of model number to obtain information about
device type, range, and materials of construction.
Description Translates user supplied Table II portion of model
number into information about flange assembly types
and materials of construction (for flange units only)
Show Flange
Assembly
Information
Method
Set-up User selects appropriate Table II portion of model
number to obtain information about flange types and
materials of construction (for flange units only).


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
123
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters
Review Parameters
What you want to view What to do
Install Date
Power Fail Count
Electronics Temperature
% Life in Stress
% Service Life Used
Static Pressure

Select Online\Device Setup\Review

Install Date
Description Date of device installation. Install Date Parameter
Set-up User enters a date once during device lifetime. Once
date is entered no further updates are possible and
value becomes read only and is permanently saved.
NVM Backup is immediate.
Note Date displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year

Power fail count
Description Total number of power-ups experienced by the unit. Power fail count Parameter
Set-up None – initialized to zero prior to leaving factory.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period– see note 2.
Note Only one power failure in each 24 hour period is counted.

Electronics Temperature
Description Temperature inside the electronics housing.
Set-up None – units same as for SV (Secondary Variable).
Electronics
Temperature
Parameter
No accuracy is specified for this measurement! It is certainly
less than the accuracy for SV or meter body temperature.
Note
This value is intended to be used for informational purposes
only and should not be used for control.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 124
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters
% Service Life in Stress
Description Percent of service life spent in stressful conditions. Indicates the % of
service life where one or more of PV, static pressure, meter body
temperature or electronics temperature are within 10% of respective
range limits.
% Service
Life in
Stress
Parameter
Set-up None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period– see note 2.

% Service Life Used
Description Value is based on electronics temperature. Service life accumulates faster
at higher temperatures with an exponential relationship. At 25 degrees C
service life is expected to be approximately 27 years.
Set-up
% Service
Life Used
Parameter
None.
NVM Backup once each 24 hour period– see note 2.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
125
9-Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release - Review Parameters

Static Pressure
Description Working pressure also known as pressure on high
side of the device for DP (Differential Pressure)
devices.
SP value for AP (Absolute Pressure) or GP (Guage
Pressure) type devices is always 0.
Static
Pressure**
Parameter
None - Units are always psi (pounds per square inch). Set-up
No accuracy is specified for this measurement! Note
It is certainly less than the accuracy for PV.
This value is intended to be used for informational
purposes only and should not be used for control.
Note 1: Time and date format
Date and time are displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format where mm=month, dd=day, yyyy=year
and in HH:MM:SS format where HH=hours, MM=minutes, SS=seconds.
Note 2: These parameters are backed up in NVM memory once per day so that the maximum numbers of
writes, as specified by the NVM’s manufacturer, are not exceeded during the lifetime of the
pressure transmitter. This means that when power to the device is lost and then re-applied the
value reverts back to the value that existed when last backed up to NVM. If the last backup had
occurred 23 hours and 59 minutes ago then a full days worth of data would be lost.
Note 3: ** Future Feature to be added for DP meter body type; static pressure is 0.0 for AP and GP type
meter bodies.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 126
10— Maintenance - Introduction

10— Maintenance
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines and replacing damaged parts. The
topics covered in this section are:
Preventive maintenance of the meter body barrier diaphragms and process piping to the transmitter.
Replacement of damaged parts such as the transmitter PWA and meter body.
Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance routines and schedules
The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance routine at regularly scheduled
intervals. However, you should consider carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on
a schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blow-
down facilities or purge systems are being used.
Check piping for leaks.
Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter.
Clean the transmitter’s pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms.
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured, sediment or other foreign
particles may collect in the process head cavity/chamber and cause faulty measurement. In addition, the
barrier diaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitter’s meter body may become coated with a residue from
the process medium. The latter is also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type
transmitters.
In most cases, you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitter’s meter body to clean
the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms. For flange mount and remote seal
diaphragms, you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 43 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms. You
may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements. Figure 42
shows an exploded view of a DP transmitter’s meter body for reference.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
127
10— Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Table 43 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms

Step Action
1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process. Open vent in process head to drain fluid
from transmitter’s meter body, if required.


ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart.
2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body. Remove process
heads and bolts. See Figure 41.
3 Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.
4 Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion. Look for possible residue
and clean if necessary.
If diaphragm is dented, has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles, performance may be
affected. Contact TAC for assistance.
5 Replace O-ring.


ATTENTION
- We recommend that you install a new O-ring whenever a process head is removed for
cleaning.
- The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 inches (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3
inches (33 mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high pressure model
STG180, GP transmitters, use the small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other
models of GP and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use
both O-rings together.
Larger O-ring
groove for
lower pressure
applications
Smaller O-ring
groove for
high pressure
applications
22518

Figure 41 GP/AP Process Head

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 128
10— Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
129

- For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 42.
6 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as “Neverseize” or
equivalent.
7 Replace process head or heads and bolts. Finger tighten nuts.
8 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 42, in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.
1
2
4
3
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque

9 Return transmitter to service.



CAUTION
Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the transmitter back into service or during
cleaning operations. See Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual.

Nuts
Process
head
O-ring
Center
section
Process
head
O-ring
Bolts

Figure 42 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body
10— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Torque ratings Table 44 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type.
Table 44 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings

Bolt Type 7/16 x 14 UNC
Meterbody Type
51452557-001
(Carbon Steel -
standard; no option
specified)
5142557-002 and –003
(NACE [“CR” option] and
Non-NACE [“SS” option]
Stainless Steel)
51452557-004
(B7M Alloy Steel
[“B7” option])
51451864XXXX except
…XXX5
(All STD 3000 and SMV
3000 Transmitters except
STD110)
67,8 N•M +/- 3,4 N•M 56,9 N•M +/- 2,8 N•M 48,8 N•M +/- 2,4 N•M
(50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 Lb-
Ft)
(42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft) (36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft)
51451864XXX5
(Model STD110
Transmitter [draft range]
only)
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-
Ft)
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft)
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft)


Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
About the PWA Electronics Board
The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters is of the single PWA design. The PWA contains
connectors for the flex-tape conductor from the sensor, the loop power wires and a connector for the
optional smart meter cable.
The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA.
Table 45 Replacing PWA

Step Action
1 Turn OFF transmitter power.



ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart..
2 Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing.


ESD HAZARD
We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the PWA, since
electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components.
a) If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to
remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter
assembly.
b) Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from
housing.
3
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 130
10— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
131
Step Action
c) Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from
PWA, and remove PWA.


4 If your transmitter:
-
-
has Local Smart Meter Option, then go to step 5.
does not have local smart meter option, then go to step 6.
5 Unplug meter cable from J4 connector on PWA, and remove cable from restraining clip. Plug
cable into J4 connector on replacement PWA. Route cable through slot and under restraining
clip.

6 Select the jumper location for the write protection desired (Read/Write Access or Read-Only
Access).
7 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3, as applicable, to install PWA and bracket to transmitter
housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
10— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Step Action
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
8 Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.

ATTENTION

Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.
9 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.
10 If applicable, verify local smart meter configuration data. Reconfigure selected engineering
units and lower and upper display range values as required. (See Appendix A for details.)

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 132
10— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
Replacing Meter Body
You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP,
GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head(s).
Use the procedure in Table 46 to install a meter body only.
Table 46 Replacing Meter Body Only

Step Action
1 Complete first 3 Steps in Table 45, as applicable, to remove PWA.
2 Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside housing.
Process Head
Process Head
Meter Body
Set Screw


3 Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing.
4 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section. Remove process
heads and bolts
5 Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.
6 Replace O-ring.


ATTENTION
The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 in (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33
mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure, model STG180, GP
transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP
and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use both O-rings
together.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
133
10— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 134
Step Action
6,
cont’d
Larger O-ring
groove for
lower pressure
applications
Smaller O-ring
groove for
high pressure
applications
22518

GP/AP Process Head
- For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see detail illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 42.
7 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as “Neverseize” or
equivalent.
8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter body. Finger tighten nuts.

Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body
Nuts
O-ring
Process
head
Flex Tape
Meter
Body
Bolts
HP SIDE
LP
SIDE
O-ring
Process
head


10— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
Step Action
9 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 44 in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.
22519
1
2
3
4
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque


10 Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and screw new meter body into
housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of
electronics housing.
11 Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header. Loosen set screw half
turn, rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw.
12 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 45, as applicable, to return PWA and bracket to
transmitter housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
13 Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.

ATTENTION

Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can
rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.
14 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power
15 Verify transmitter’s configuration data. Restore saved database, if applicable.



February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
135
-
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 136



11— Calibration - Introduction
11— Calibration
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter’s analog output and measurement range.
It also covers the procedure for resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to measurement
range calibration.
This section includes these topics.
How to calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit using the communicator
How to perform a two-point calibration of the transmitter
How to perform a correct reset to return the transmitter calibration to its default values.
Overview
About calibration
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at periodic intervals to maintain accuracy. If
a recalibration is required, we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed
from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accuracy.
Before you recalibrate the transmitter’s measurement range, you must calibrate the transmitter’s analog
output signal. See Table 47 for procedure.
You can also use the communicator to reset the calibration data to default values, if they are corrupted,
until the transmitter can be recalibrated. See Table 46 in this section for details.



ATTENTION
All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See page 74 for
information about poll address. HART
©
6 transmitters have a separate menu item for switching
to analog output mode.

Equipment Required



ATTENTION
Depending upon the calibration you choose, you may need any of the following test equipment
to accurately calibrate the transmitter:
- Digital voltmeter or milliammeter with 0.02% accuracy or better
- HART
©
hand-held communicator
- Calibration-standard pressure source with a 0.02% accuracy
- 250 ohm resistor with 0.01% accuracy or better.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
137
11— Calibration - Calibrating Analog Output Signal
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 138
Calibrating Analog Output Signal
You can calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit at its 0 and 100% levels by using the transmitter in
its constant-current source mode. It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service.
The procedure in Table 47 shows the steps for calibrating the output signal for a transmitter in the analog
mode.



ATTENTION
You can calculate milliamperes of current from a voltage measurement by using the following
equation:
dc milliamps = 1000 x
voltage
resistance


Table 47 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
See Figure 30 in Section 7 for sample test equipment hookup.


ATTENTION
Be sure the accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or better for current measurements made by
voltage drop.
2 Starting from “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
D/A trim
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
When prompts appears, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter (0.03% accuracy or
better) in loop to check readings. Press OK.
3 The following display prompts will appear:
- Setting field device output to 4mA. Press OK.
- Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.
- Field device output 4.000 mA equal to reference meter?
1 Yes
2 No
÷ If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to “Enter
meter value” prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
÷ If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Go to Step 4.




11— Calibration - Calibrating Range
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
139
Step Action
4 The following display prompts will appear:
-
-
-
÷
÷
Setting field device output to 20mA. Press OK.
Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.
Field device output 20.000 mA equal to reference meter?
1 Yes
2 No
If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to “Enter
meter value” prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Prompt notifies you that the field device will be returned to its original output.

Calibrating Range
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two-point calibration. This means when you calibrate two points in the
range, all the points in that range adjust to that calibration.
The procedure in Table 48 and Table 49 shows the steps for calibrating a differential pressure (DP) type
transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 inH
2
O for example purposes. This procedure assumes that the transmitter
is removed from the process and located in a controlled environment.



ATTENTION
You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.02% or better to do a range
calibration. Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water
ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2˚F (4˚C).

Table 48 Calibrating Measurement Range – Correct LRV
Correct LRV

Step Action
1 Connect power supply and communicator to signal terminals on transmitter’s terminal block.
Connect precision pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter.
See Figure 43 for typical communicator, power supply, and pressure source hookup for
calibration.
2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation.
3 Turn on communicator.
4 From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Correct Input LRV
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.

11— Calibration - Calibrating Range
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 140
Step Action
5 When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to LRV (0%), then press OK.
6 When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.
7* On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date”, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter
8* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press
Enter
9* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field)”, enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter
10* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field)”, enter the
Seconds field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter
11 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter.

*HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to “Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records” under the
“Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.


Table 49 Calibrating Measurement Range – Correct URV
Correct URV

Step Action
1 Connect power supply and communicator to signal terminals on transmitter’s terminal block.
Connect precision pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter.
See Figure 43 for typical communicator, power supply, and pressure source hookup for
calibration.
2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation.
3 Turn on communicator.
4 From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Correct Input URV
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
5 When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to URV (100%), then press
OK.
6 When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.
7* On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date”, enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (ex: 05/27/2009), then press Enter
8* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour field)”,
enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH (ex: 13), then press Enter
11— Calibration - Calibrating Range
Step Action
9* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field)”, enter the Minutes
field MM (ex: 56), then press Enter
10* On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Second field)”, enter the Seconds
field SS (ex: 56), then press Enter
11 When prompted, return loop to automatic control. Press Enter

*HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics For ST 3000 Release” only with the Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev
5 and Software Rev 36.
For details about these parameters refer to “Diagnostics/Service - Calibration Records” under the
“Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.

-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
250 O
24Vdc
Power
Supply
+
-
DVM
ST 3000 HART
Low
Pressure
Head
Communicator
Dead Weight
Tester
or
Precision
Pressure Source
NOTE: Polarity of communicator
connection does not matter.


Figure 43 Typical Range Calibration Hookup

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
141
11— Calibration - Resetting Calibration
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 142
Resetting Calibration
Background
Every ST 3000 transmitter is factory-characterized. The characterization process calculates a mathematical
model of the performance of the transmitter’s sensors and stores that data in the transmitter’s memory.
Small residual errors result from the sensor data acquisition and modeling process. These errors can be
eliminated through calibration, using either a zero offset or a span correction.
A Corrects Reset returns the zero and span calibration factors to their default values. The transmitter
calculates its output based on the characterization equation alone, without any compensation for the
residual errors.
A typical zero offset correction is less than 0.1 inches of water (based on a 400 inH
2
O range) and a typical
span correction is less than 0.2% regardless of the range of calibration (down to the point where
specification turndown begins). Typical performance of a 400 inH
2
O transmitter with Corrects Reset can
be expressed as:
Accuracy = 0.2% + (0.1”/span”) • 100%
By calibrating the zero, the typical performance will be 0.2% or better.
For transmitter ranges other than 400”, the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper
Range Limit to 400. For example, for a 100 psi transmitter, the initial zero offset can be expressed by:
0.1” • 2768/400 = 0.7” or 0.025 psi.
Please note that these are typical values, not hard specifications.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 50 shows how to reset calibration data to default values in a transmitter using the
communicator.

Table 50 Resetting Calibration Data

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2 From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Calibration
Reset Corrects
3 When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Reset Corrects is about to occur. Press OK.
When message “Reset Corrects OK” appears, press OK.
Previous calibration “CORRECTS” are removed and calibration is reset to default values.
4 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.


- Introduction
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
143

12 - Diag/Service – Advanced Diagnostics
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about theAdvanced Diagnostics sub-menu under the Diag/Service Menu.
This information is only available for the HART
©
6 “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” with the
Universal Rev 6, Field Device Rev 5 and Software Rev 36.
Overview
About Advanced Diagnostics
The “Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release ST 3000 Smart Transmitter provides the user with a
comprehensive set of advanced diagnostics information, which is accessible via the Advanced Diagnostics
sub-menu within the Diag/Service Menu. Use the following steps in Table 51 to view diagnostic
information:
Table 51 View Diagnostics

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
See Figure 30 in Section 7 for sample test equipment hookup.
2 Starting from “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
- Device setup
-
-
-
Diag/Service
Advanced Diagnostics
Choose from the menu, any of the items below and follow screen prompts to view the
diagnostics
- Install Date
- Time In Service
- % Service Life in Stress
- Power Up Diagnosticss
- ET Tracking Diagnostics
- Operating Voltage
- PV Tracking Diagnostics
- MBT Tracking Diagnostics
- % Service Life Used
- SP Tracking Diagnostics

For details about the above diagnotics refer to “Diagnostics/Service - Advanced Diagnostics” under the
“Advanced Diagnostics for ST 3000 Release” topic.
12 - Diag/Service – Advanced Diagnostics - Overview
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 144

13— Troubleshooting - Introduction
13— Troubleshooting
Introduction
About this section
This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the communicator and describes what they
mean. An interpretation of diagnostic messages is given and suggestions of the possible cause and
corrective action for each message. Procedures are provided for running a status check.
This section includes these topics.
A summary of the different diagnostic message categories that can be displayed by the communicator.
A description of the diagnostic messages and a recommended action to correct the condition or fault.
Troubleshooting Overview
Diagnostics
The communicator and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal diagnostics to monitor the
functions and status of the control loop and their communications link.
When a diagnostic failure is detected, a corresponding message is generated for the communicator display.
Troubleshooting tool
Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the communicator for status messages and then interpreting the
diagnostic messages. You should also use the communicator to verify the transmitter’s configuration data
and check to be sure that your process is operating correctly.
To access transmitter diagnostics
You access the transmitter diagnostics starting at the “Online” menu of the communicator.
You then select:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Device status
The Device status menu appears.
2
ST3000:PT 3011
Device status
1
2
Cri tical
Non-Critical
HELP SAVE HOME
3
4
Info
Ext Dev Status


For more details, refer to Table 52 - Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status and - Diagnostic
Message Interpretation Table.
Select “Critical” or “Non-Critical” to view the status of the transmitter’s diagnostics. Device status
diagnostics are shown as either ON (in alarm) or OFF (no alarm).
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
145
13— Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Summary
The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these three categories:
Critical Failures
Non-Critical Failures
Information Status (“Advanced Diagnostic Release for ST 3000” version only)
Communication Errors
A description of the messages in each category is given in the following paragraphs.
Critical failures
Table 52 summarizes the critical communicator status message displays. A critical failure drives the
transmitter’s output to its failsafe direction—upscale or downscale.
Table 52 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures

Message Description
INVALID DATABASE Database corrupted upon power-up.
CHAR PROM FAULT Characterization PROM failure.
SUSPECT INPUT Input pressure may be incorrect
DAC DIODE FAULT Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) fault
NVM FAULT Transmitter Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) fault
RAM FAULT Transmitter Random Access Memory (RAM) fault
PROM FAULT Transmitter Programmable Read Only Memory
(PROM) fault
PAC FAULT * Operating System Flow Control Fault
FLOW CONTROL FAULT ** Operating System Flow Control Fault

* HART
©
5 only.
** HART
©
6 only.
Once a critical fault has been corrected, you must clear the critical status from the transmitter. See Clearing
Critical Status later in this section.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 146
13— Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages
Non-critical failures
Table 53 summarizes the non-critical communicator status message displays. All communicator functions
remain operational during a non-critical failure.

Table 53 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures

Message Description
SENSOR OVER TEMP Meter body temperature is too high.
EXCESS ZERO CORR Zero calibration value is too large (shift is larger
than characterization).
EXCESS SPAN CORR SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable
limits for accurate operation.
IN OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is operating as current source.
M.B. OVERLOAD OR
METERBODY FAULT
Input pressure is more than two times greater
than the Upper Range Limit of the transmitter.
CORRECTS RESET Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required
accuracy.
NO DAC TEMP COMP No temperature compensation data exists for
calculations


Table 54 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Info Status
(Supported only under Advanced Diagnostics Release for ST 3000)

Message Description
OP VOLTS<10 Voltage available at the connection terminals to
the device is less than 10 Volts.

Other error messages that may appear due to noncompatability of communicator software or transmitter
communication mode.

Table 55 Other Error Messages

Message Description
NOTICE: Upgrade 275 software to access new
Xmtr functions. Continue with old description?
You have connected to a device that has a newer
revision of device description than what is in the
communicator.
In multidrop mode The transmitter poll address is not 0 (zero). You
have tried to change the analog output of a
transmitter that is in multidrop mode.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
147
13— Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages
Communication errors
Table 56 summarizes the message displays associated with communication errors. All communicator
functions are disabled when a communication error occurs.

Table 56 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors

Message Description
Device Disconnected

Communication with a device has been
interrupted.
No Device Found

Communicator was unable to establish
communications with any device upon power-up.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 148
13— Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
149
Interpreting Messages
Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the communicator are listed in alphabetical order
in Table 57 along with a description and suggested action to be taken.

Table 57 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table

Message Possible Cause What to Do
Char PROM Fault Characterization PROM is not
functioning correctly.
Replace meter body.
Corrects Reset All calibration “CORRECTS”
were deleted and data was reset
to default values.
Recalibrate transmitter.
See Section 10.
DAC Diode Fault Digital to Analog Converter
(DAC) fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
Device Disconnected Previously established
communication with a transmitter
has been lost. Could be a
transmitter or loop failure.
- Try communicating again.
- Check that transmitter’s loop integrity
has been maintained, that
communicator is connected
properly, and that loop resistance
is at least 250Ω.
Electronic Fault Electronics module is not
functioning properly.
Replace electronics module. Do not
SAVE data.
Excess Span Corr SPAN correction factor is outside
acceptable limits. Could be that
transmitter was in output mode.
-
-
-
Check input pressure and be sure
that it matches calibrated range
value.
Check meter body.
Do a URV CORRECT procedure.
Excess Zero Corr ZERO correction factor is outside
acceptable limits. Could be that
INPUT was incorrect or
transmitter was in output mode
during a CORRECT procedure.
-
-
-
Check input pressure and be sure
that it matches calibrated range
value.
Check meter body.
Do an LRV CORRECT procedure.
In multidrop mode The transmitter poll address is
not 0 (zero). You have tried to
change the analog output of a
transmitter that is in multidrop
mode.
HART
©
5: Change “HART mode” of
transmitter to analog by changing poll
address to 0.
HART
©
6: Enable Loop Current Mode
In Output Mode Transmitter is operating as a
current source.
Exit output mode (Loop test)-. Perform
Master reset, (or cycle power).


Table continued on next page ¬
13— Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 150
Message Possible Cause What to Do
Invalid Database Transmitter database was
incorrect at power-up.
-
-
Try communicating again.
Verify database configuration,
Manually update non-volatile
memory with each parameter.
M.B. Overload
OR
Meterbody Fault
Pressure input is two times
greater than URL of transmitter.
-
-
Check range and, if required, replace
transmitter with one that has a
wider range.
Meter body may have been
damaged. Check the transmitter
for accuracy and linearity. Replace
meter body and recalibrate, if
needed.
No DAC Temp Comp No temperature compensation
data exists for calculations.
Effect will be minor degradation of
ambient temperature influence
specifications. Replace electronics
module (PWA).
No Device Found No response from transmitter.
Could be transmitter or loop
failure.
-
-
Try communicating again.
Check that transmitter’s loop integrity
has been maintained, that
communicator is connected
properly, and that loop resistance
is at least 250Ω.
NOTICE: Upgrade 275/375
software to access new Xmtr
functions. Continue with old
description?
You have connected to a device
that has a newer revision of
device description than what is in
the communicator.
Get updated device description for the
transmitter installed in the
communicator.
Note: You can continue
communicating with the transmitter, but
will not have access to full transmitter
functions.
NVM Fault Transmitter’s nonvolatile memory
fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
HART
©
5: PAC Fault
HART
©
6: Flow Control Fault
Operating System Flow Control
Fault
Replace electronics module (PWA)
HART
©
5: N/A
HART
©
6 (Advanced
Diagnostics for ST 3000
Release): Operating Voltage
Less Than 10V
Voltage available at the
connection terminals to the
device is less than 10 Volts.
Check power supply and check that
transmitter’s loop integrity has been
maintained and that loop resistance is
at least 250Ω.
PROM Fault Transmitter Programmable Read
Only Memory (PROM) fault
Replace electronics module (PWA).
RAM Fault Transmitter Random Access
Memory (RAM) fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
Sensor Over Temp Meter body temperature is too
high. Accuracy and life span may
decrease if it remains high.
Take steps to insulate meter body from
temperature source.
Suspect Input Input data seems wrong. Could
be a process problem, but it
could also be a meter body or
PWA problem.
-
-
Put transmitter in output mode.
Diagnostic messages should
identify where problem is. If no
other diagnostic message is given,
condition is most likely meter body
related.
Check installation and replace meter
body if condition persists.
13— Troubleshooting - Clearing Critical Status
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
151
Clearing Critical Status
After a critical failure has been diagnosed and corrected the critical status must be cleared from the
transmitter. This can be done by performing a master reset using the communicator.
A master reset causes a hardware reset of the transmitter, which actually is the same as cycling the power to
the transmitter.
Table 58 outlines the steps for resetting the transmitter.
Table 58 Resetting the Transmitter

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2 From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
Device setup
Diag/Service
Master reset
3 When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Master Reset is about to occur. Press OK.
When message “Master reset OK” appears, press OK.
Previous calibration “CORRECTS” are removed and calibration is reset to default values.
4 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.

14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
14— Parts List
Replacement Parts
About this section
All individually saleable parts for the various transmitter models are listed in this section. Some parts are
illustrated for identification. Parts are identified and listed in the corresponding tables as follows:
All individually saleable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout. For example: 1, 2, 3, and
so on.
All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each figure by key number callout with the letter “K”
prefix. For example: K1, K2, K3, and so on.
Parts denoted with a “†” are recommended spares. See Table 70 for summary list of recommended spare
parts.
Figure 40 shows major parts for a given model with reference to parts list figures.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 152
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts


Figure 44 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
153
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
2
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
4 3
1


Figure 45 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.


Table 59 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.

Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
1 30752770-003

Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount
2 30752770-004

Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G

3 51196557-001 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount


4 51196557-002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 154
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts


Figure 46 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End.







K1
1
3/K2


Figure 47 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
155
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43

Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
Key
No.
1 30756961-503 End Cap 1
2 30756996-503 End Cap, meter 1
3 51205897-501†
51404078-502†
Terminal assembly without lightning protection
Terminal assembly with lightning protection
1
4 51309389-501
51309389-502
51309389-503
Local Zero and Span Adjust Only
Local Smart Meter Only
Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust
1
5 51309397-505
51309397-515
HART
©
6 Electronics Module Assembly (PWA)
NAMUR Compliant HART
©
6 Electronics Module Assembly
1
6 51204038-001 Retaining Clip 1
7 30756997-501 Analog meter 1
K1 30757503-002† Electronics housing seals kit (includes O-rings)
K2 51197425-001

51197425-002
Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)

Not
Shown
30757504-001 Electronics housing hardware kit, DP/I, GP/I, LGP/I (includes screws,
gasket, plate, washers, cover terminal, and spacers)



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 156
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts



Figure 48 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD904, STD924,
STD930, STD974, STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater)
Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45.

Key
No.
Part Number Description Qty/
Unit
1 Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus R300
Series 100 Meter Body replacement kit includes:
Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)
1
Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus R300
Series 900 Meter Body replacement kit includes:
Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)
1
Bolting Kits:
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
157
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Part Number Description Qty/
Unit





Kc
K4
K8
51452866-001
51452866-002
51452866-003
51452866-004

································
································
································
Bolts and Nuts Kit, Carbon Steel
Bolts A286 SS (NACE) and Nuts, 304 SS (NACE) Kit
Bolts, 316 SS (non-NACE) and Nuts, 316 SS (non-NACE) Kit
Bolts B7M and Nuts 7M Kit
Each Bolts and Nuts Kit includes:
Bolt, Hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 Inches long (Flange Adapter)········
Nut, Hex, 7/16 UNC (Process Head)····················································
Bolt, Hex Head, 7/16 UNC X 3.25 inches long (Process Head)············






4
4
4
Vent and Plug Kits:




K1
K2
K3
30753785-001
30753787-001
30753786-001

································
································
································
Drain and Plug Kit, stainless steel
Drain and Plug Kit, Monel
Drain and Plug Kit, Hastelloy C
Each Drain and Plug Kit includes:
Pipe Plug ····················································································
Vent Plug ·····························································································
Vent Bushing ·······················································································





4
2
2
Meterbody Gasket Kits:


K6
Ka
K7
51452865-001
51452865-002
·································
·································
·································
Meterbody Gasket Kit (PTFE Material); Kit includes:
Meterbody Gasket Kit (Viton Material); Kit includes:
Gasket, Process Head ·········································································
Gasket, Flange Adapter ·······································································
O-Ring, Meterbody to Electronics Housing ··········································


6
6
3
Process Head Gasket Kits:
K6
K6
K6
51452868-001
51452868-002
51452868-007
Gasket only, Process Head (12 PTFE Gaskets/pack)
Gasket only, Process Head (6 Viton Head O-Rings)
Gasket only, Process Head Graphite Gasket (use only as replacement
of existing graphite gasket)
12
6
6
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 158
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Part Number Description Qty/
Unit
Flange Adapter Gasket Kits:
Ka
Ka
Ka
51452868-004
51452868-005
51452868-0078
Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 PTFE Adapter Gaskets
Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 VITON Adapter O-Rings
Gasket only, Flange Adapter Graphite Gasket (use only as
replacement of existing graphite gasket)
6
6
6
½ inch NPT Flange Adapter Kits:













Ka
Kb
Kc


51452867-110
51452867-210
51452867-310
51452867-410

51452867-550
51452867-350

51452867-130
51452867-330


···································
···································
···································
Flange Adapter Kit, with:
SS Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
SS Flange Adapters and with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
SS Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
SS Flange Adapters and with B7M alloy steel bolts

Monel Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
Monel Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts

Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts

Each 1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter Kit includes:
Gasket, Flange Adapter ································································
1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter ·························································
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter ··














2
2
4

Blind Flange Adapter Kits:






Ka
Kb
Kc

51452867-100
51452867-200
51452867-300
51452867-400


···································
···································
···································
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with Carbon Steel bolts
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
SS Blind Flange Adapters and B7M alloy steel bolts

Each Blind Flange Adapter Kit includes:






2
2
Gasket, Flange Adapter ································································
Blind Flange Adapter ······································································
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter ·· 4


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
159
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts


Figure 49 ST 3000 Model STG944, STG974 (Rev S or greater)

Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44 and Figure 45

Key
No
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Process Head Kits:


51452864-010
51452864-012

51452864-020
51452864-022

51452864-030
51452864-032

51452864-040
51452864-042

51452864-050
51452864-052

Process Head Assembly Kit, with PTFE Gasket and with:
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain

Stainless steel head without side vent/drain
Stainless steel head with side vent/drain

Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain
Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain

Monel head without side vent/drain
Monel head with side vent/drain

Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 160
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit


















K1
K2
K3
K5
K6
Ka



51452864-110
51452864-112

51452864-120
51452864-122

51452864-130
51452864-132

51452864-140
51452864-142

51452864-150
51452864-152


···································
···································
···································
···································
···································
···································

Process Head Assembly Kit, with VITON Gasket and with:
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain

Stainless steel head without side vent/drain
Stainless steel head with side vent/drain

Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain
Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain

Monel head without side vent/drain
Monel head with side vent/drain

Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain

Each Process head Assembly Kit includes:
Pipe Plug (See Note 1, 2.)·····························································
Vent Plug (See Note 1.)································································
Vent Bushing (See Note 1.)··························································
Process Head ··············································································
Gasket (PTFE), Process Head ····················································
Gasket (PTFE), Flange Adapter···················································
NOTE 1 : This item is made of the same material as the
Process Heads, except for Kits with carbon steel Process
Heads, which include stainless steel Pipe Plug, Vent Plug,
and Vent Bushing.
NOTE 2: The Kit for Process Heads without side vent/drain
does not include Pipe Plugs (K1).

















2
1
1
1
1
1

Reference Head:
K9 51452951-001 Carbon Steel Blind Reference Head
K9 51452951-002 316 SS Blind Reference Head (Model Selection Guide HR Option)
1
1

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
161
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts

K1
1
K2
K3
2
K4



Figure 50 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body


Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46.

Key No. Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
2 See Table 64 Process head (GP/AP models) 1
1 Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus
R300
Series 100 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1
Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus
R300
Series 900 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models) 1
30754154-002† Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except
STG180 (3 sets)

30754154-003† Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body (3
sets)

K2 O-ring 3
K3 Gasket, Teflon [for gasket only - 30756445-502 (narrow profile L.P),
or 30756445-503 (STG180)
6
Gasket, Viton [for gasket only - 30756445-504 (narrow profile L.P),
or 30756445-505 (STG180)
6
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 162
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key No. Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
30753792-001 Bolts & nuts kit, all models - narrow profile (carbon steel)
K1 Nut, hex, metric, M8 carbon steel 4
K4 Bolt, hex head, metric, M8, 50 mm long 4
30753793-002 A286 SS (NACE) Bolts & 304 SS (NACE) nuts kit, all models -
narrow profile

K1 Nut, hex, 5/16 (304 stainless steel) 4
K4 Bolt, hex head, 5/16-18 4
30753793-003 Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts. Contains:

K1 5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Heavy Hex Nuts 4
K4 5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Hex Cap Screw 4



Table 64 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for
Narrow Profile Meter Body

Material Fitting Size Models: STA122, STA140,
STG140, STG170, STG180,
STA922, STA940
Carbon steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-001
Stainless steel (Series 100) 9/16 - 18UNF-2B 30755124-002
Carbon steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-005
Stainless steel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-006
Monel 1/2 in NPT 30755124-008
Hastelloy C 1/2 in NPT 30755124-007

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
163
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
K1
K2
K3
1
K2
K1


Figure 51 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies.

Table 65 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47.

Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
1 Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body without heads (GP models) 1
K1 30757506-001 Head bolts carbon steel, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-001 Head bolts stainless steel/NACE, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-002 Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
4
K2 30757501-001 Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket

30757501-002 Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head without side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket

30757502-001 Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30757502-002 Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets

30756941-005 Stainless steel blind reference head (HR option)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 164
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
K3 30757505-001† Process head gasket kit
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Teflon flange
adapter gaskets (30679622-001), 6 Viton head gaskets (30749274-004)

Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
K4 30679622-501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6
30749274-502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6





Hexagonal Body Round Body


Figure 52 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body.


Table 66 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48.

Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
1 Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body (LGP model) 1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body (LGP model) 1


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
165
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts


Figure 53 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.


Table 67 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49.

Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
Key
No.
1 Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body (Flush Mount model) 1
30756445-508 Gasket Kit (0-rings)
51204496-001 316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit
51204497-001 Calibration Sleeve Kit

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 166
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts




1


Extended Flange Design






Pseudo Flange Design



Figure 54 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
167
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 68 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50.

Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
Key
No.
1 Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body 1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body 1

30749372-005 O-ring seal 1
30749372-001 O-ring seal 1
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
30754419-006 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-008 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-022 Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
30754419-024 Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2
K2 Flange adapter 1
K3 Gasket 1
K4 Filter screen 1
30754419-007 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-023 Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1 Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg. 2
K2 Flange adapter 1
K3 Gasket 1
K5 30757503-002 Housing seal kit 1

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 168
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts

1
1
Sanitary Seal Small Flange NPT


Figure 55 High Temperature Meter Body.



Table 69 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51.

Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
1 Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body 1
Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket
51204982-001 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204982-003 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ SS NACE. hardware)
51204982-002 Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Hastelloy Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204984-001 Gasket GP/I (includes Teflon gasket and Viton O-ring)
Flange Adapter - Not Shown
51204983-001 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-002 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-017 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-018 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-003 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-004 Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-005 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-006 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-019 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-020 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-007 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
169
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Part Number Description Quantity
Per Unit
51204983-008 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-013 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-014 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-023 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-024 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-015 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-016 Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-009 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-010 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-021 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-022 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-011 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-012 Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-025 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-026 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-037 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-038 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-027 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-028 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-029 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-030 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-039 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-040 Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-031 Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-032 Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-033 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-034 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-041 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-042 Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-035 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-036 Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 170
14— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 70 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts.

Reference Spares for
Part Number Description Figure
Nmbr.
Key
Nmbr.
1-10
Units
10-
100
Units
100-
1000
Units
Electronics Housing Assembly Figs 42 and 43
51309397-505

Electronics Module Assembly (HART
©
6)
42 5 1 1-2 2-4
30757503-002

Series 100/900 housing seal kit 42, 43 K1 1 1-2 2-4
51205897-501


51404078-502
Series 100/900 terminal assembly without lightning
protection

Series 100/900 terminal assembly with lightning
protection
43 3/K2 1 1 1-2
Process head gasket kit 1 1-4 4-10


30757505-001
For STD924-A, B, E, F, and J; STD930-A, B, E, F,
and J; STG944; STG974 models
Teflon and Viton
45, 47 K3



30753788-003
30753788-004
For all other Series 100 DP and STD924-C, D, G, H,
K, and L; STD930-C, D, G, H, K, and L; and STD974
models
Teflon
Viton
44 K7


30754154-002
For STA122, STA140, STA922, STA940, STG140,
and STG170
Teflon and Viton
46 K1
30754154-003 For STG180 46 K3
Meter Body 1 1-2 2-4
Specify Series 100/900 DP Models 44 1
complete model Series 900 DP Models 44, 45 1
number from Series 100/900 GP/AP Models 46 1
nameplate plus Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 47 1
R300 Series 100/900 LGP/LAP and Series 900 AP Models 48 1
Series 900 Flush Mount Models 49 1
Series 100/900 Flange Mount Models 50 1
Series 100 High Temperature Models 51 1

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
171
- Replacement Parts
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 172
14— Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams
14— Reference Drawings
Wiring Diagrams
Contents
These wiring diagrams are included in numerical order behind this section for wiring reference.
External Wiring Diagrams
Table 71 External Wiring Diagrams

ST 3000 HART
©

Description Drawing number
For intrinsically safe application (FM) 51205784 Release 300
For intrinsically safe application (CENELEC) 51204215 Series 100, 900
For intrinsically safe application (CSA) 51450806 Transmitters


Dimension Drawings
Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and are listed in this manual. If you
need a copy of a drawing, please determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell
representative to obtain a copy.


5/08 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 173
14— Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 174
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Introduction
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference
Introduction
About this section
This section describes the integral smart meter options available with the ST 3000 Release 300
HART
©
transmitter.
Procedures are given for setting range values of the transmitter using the smart meter pushbuttons.
You can use the meter pushbuttons or the HART
©
communicator to set up the smart meter display to
indicate transmitter PV output.
Typical smart meter indications are given as well as examples and descriptions of possible error codes
displayed on the smart meter.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
175
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Introduction
Smart meter option
Depending upon your transmitter model, you can equip the ST 3000 transmitter with the Smart Meter
option (option SM). This new integral smart meter is designed for ST 3000 Release 300 Transmitters and
provides functionality not available with other smart meter designs.
The smart meter provides an LCD local interface that displays both analog and digital indications of the
transmitter output and can be configured to display pressure in user-selected engineering units.
There are three meter option types:
Meter option Description
Smart Meter with local Zero and Span
Adjustments – Features smart meter LCD
interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
units and lower range/upper range values, and
zero/span adjustments.
% 100 0
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO


Local Zero and Span Adjustments only –
Provides pushbuttons to make zero and span
adjustments.
SPAN
ZERO


Smart Meter only – Features smart meter LCD
interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
units and lower range/upper range values.
%
100 0
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.

Note: The Model STD110 does not support local zero and span adjustments.
Smart Meter Set up
The smart meter can be set up to display pressure in a number of user-selected engineering units or even
custom units, if required. The meter display set up is part of the transmitter configuration database and can
be performed when configuring the transmitter. You can use either the HART
©
communicator or the
pushbuttons on the front of the meter to set up the smart meter display. The procedures for either method
of meter set up are provided in this appendix.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 176
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Display
Smart Meter Display
Display description
Figure A-1 shows a smart meter display with all its indicators and segments lit for reference. Descriptions
of the meter indicators are listed in Table A-1. Table A-2 shows the smart meter with the pushbuttons
highlighted and a brief description of each pushbutton. The pushbuttons are used for setting up the smart
meter display and making zero and span adjustments.

UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
%
100 0
1
8
.
80 8
-
ANALOG
In H O
2
K
GPH mmHg
GPM PSI
A
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
KNOWN VALUE
%
FLOW
o
F
o
C
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
Digital Readout
(-19990 to +19990)
Status Indicators
17-Segment Bargraph
(0 to 100%)
Engineering Unit
Indicators
K Multiplier -
Indicates digital readout
is multiplied by 1,000


Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.

Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators
Display Indicator What It Means When Lit
17-Segment Bargraph Gives a gross indication of the transmitter’s PV output from 0 to 100%.
Digital Readout Gives an indication of the transmitter’s PV output in either percent of
span or actual engineering units. The display range is ±19,990,000 and
it is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible within
the limits of the display. A second decimal place expands the precision
of range values within ±19.99 to 1/100th of a unit.
Digital readout represents output in percent of span. This is the default
engineering units selection.
%
Transmitter is configured for square root output conformity. FLOW
Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV signal. OUTPUT MODE
Transmitter in multidrop mode and showing a critical status or if
transmitter is in Analog mode, the transmitter has an output that is less
than –2.0% or greater than 106%.
CHECK STATUS
Use the communicator to check transmitter’s status.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
177
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference -
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 178
Display Indicator What It Means When Lit
KNOWN VALUE The upper value or lower value being displayed has previously been
configured to the value shown.
ANALOG Transmitter is in its analog mode. (When indicator is OFF, transmitter is
in multidrop mode)
K Multiplies digital reading by 1,000. Turns on automatically when reading
exceeds 1999.
A Transmitter is absolute pressure type. Digital readout represents
absolute values.
Engineering Units Indicators
inH2O
GPH
GPM
MmHg
PSI
Inches of Water
Gallons per hour
Gallons per minute
Millimeters of Mercury
Pounds per Square Inch
Additional Engineering Units
(stick-on label not shown)
Selectable engineering units - Available as a stick-on label from
Honeywell drawing number 30756918-001.
Kpa = Kilopascals
Mpa = Megapascals
mbar = Millibar
bar = Bar
g/cm2 = Grams per Square Centimeter
Kg/cm2 = Kilograms per Square Centimeter
mmH2O = Millimeters of Water
inHg = Inches of Mercury
mH2O = Meters of Water




Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description

Smart Meter Pushbuttons Pushbutton Function
VAR SEL. Not functional when installed with
ST 3000 transmitters.
SPAN Selects Span range setting (URV).
ZERO Selects Zero range setting.
UPPER VALUE Selects upper display limit for custom or
flow engineering units.
UNITS SET Selects engineering units for meter
display.
LOWER VALUE Selects Lower display limit for custom or
flow engineering units.
t
Decrease pushbutton
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
18 .
80 8
-
ANALOG
In H O
2
K
GPH mmHg
GPM PSI A
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
KNOWN VALUE
%
FLOW
o
F
o
C
o
Increase pushbutton

Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Specifications
Smart Meter Specifications
Operating conditions and specifications
Before installing a transmitter equipped with a smart meter or installing the smart meter in an existing
transmitter, please note the specifications and operating limits of the meter in Table A-3.

Table A-3 Smart meter specifications.
Operating Conditions

Parameter Rated Extreme, Transportation and
Storage
Ambient Temperature °F
°C
–40 to 176
–40 to 80
–58 to 194
–50 to 90
Relative Humidity %RH 10 to 90 0 to 100
Design

No error. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution. Accuracy
Shown as: ±3% of reading Display Resolution Bargraph
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99 K
199.9 K
1999 K
19990 K
±0.005 for ±19.99 reading range,
±0.05 for ±199.9 reading range,
±0.5 for ±1999 reading range,
±5 for ±19990 reading range,
±50 for ±199900 reading range,
±500 for ±1999000 reading range,
±5000 for ±19990000 reading range.
Digital Readout
Above 32°F (0°C): ½ second
@ or below 32°F (0°C): 1½ seconds
Display Update Rate

Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes
The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are true in that no damage to the meter
will occur over these temperatures, however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these
temperature extremes:
- The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 °C (176 and 194 °F), rendering the
display unreadable. This effect is only temporary, and normally occurs at 90 °C (194 °F).
- At low temperatures, the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1.5 seconds due to the slower
response time of the display. At -20 °C (-4 °F) the display becomes unreadable due to slow response
of the LCD. This is also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns
above -20 °C (-4 °F).



February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
179
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Local zero and span option
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero and span adjustments. This option
is for applications that do not require a HART
©
communicator nor digital integration with our TPS system.
About local adjustments
You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local zero and span adjustments. This is
similar to LRV correct and URV set using the HART
©
communicator. We recommend that you calibrate
the transmitter before setting up the meter for custom engineering units.
The procedure in Table A-4 shows the steps for setting the range values to applied pressures using local
zero and span adjustments. See Figure A-2 for typical local adjustment setup details.



ATTENTION
All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.

Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments

Step Action
1 Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from terminal block
side of electronics housing.
2 Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter across positive (+) and negative (–) TEST terminals.



ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may use the
smart meter in place of the milliammeter.

3 Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from PWA side of electronics housing to expose
local zero and span assembly or smart meter with zero and span adjustments.
Examples – Local zero and span assembly, and Smart meter with zero and span adjustments.
SPAN
ZERO
and
%
100 0
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 180
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
181
Step Action
4 Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes. Using an accurate pressure
source, apply desired zero equivalent pressure to transmitter.



ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head for positive
range values or vent both heads to atmosphere for zero. If zero is to equal a negative value,
apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head. For example, if zero is to equal –10
inH
2
O, you would apply 10 inH
2
O to the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head
for the zero adjustment.

5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA.
-
-
If reading is less or greater than 4 mA, Then go to Step 6.
If reading is correct, go to Step 7.



ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with zero input pressure
applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0 inH2O. In this case, the meter
reading is greater than 0 (or 4 mA).

6 d) Press and hold ZERO button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.



ATTENTION
The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er 0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.

e) Press Decrease t button once to complete this function.
The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns reading 0%.
f) Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO button.



ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the ZERO button.
If zero correction is + or – 5% of upper range limit, the CHECK STATUS indicator will be
displayed. If range setting is intentional, disregard status message.

7 Using an accurate pressure source, apply pressure equivalent to desired upper range value to
transmitter.



ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head and be sure
that the low pressure side is vented to atmosphere.
If the applied pressure produces an output of greater than 200%, the meter display will flash
O-L and the 200% value during this interim step.

Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 182

Step Action
8 Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA.
-
-
If reading is not exactly 20 mA, Then go to Step 9.
If reading is correct, go to Step 10.



ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with URV input pressure
applied, assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of 400 inH2O. In this case, the
meter reading is less than 100% (or 20 mA).

9 a) Press and hold SPAN button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.





ATTENTION
The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er 0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.

b) Press Increase o button once to complete this function.




ATTENTION
If the error code Er 4 appears, you are trying to set a SPAN value that is outside acceptable
limits for your transmitter. Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and
repeat this procedure. The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns
reading 100%.

c) Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN button.





ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the SPAN button.

10 Wait 30 seconds so that changes are copied to the transmitter’s non-volatile memory.
11 Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power.
12 Replace end-cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten lock.
13 Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end-cap and tighten lock.
14 Turn ON transmitter power and check smart meter reading, if applicable.

Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Smart Meter with
Local Zero and Span
installed on PWA side
of electronics housing
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
% 100 0
0
ANALOG
In H O
2
0 0
-


S
I
G
N
A
L


+
+







-
T
E
S
T
Power
Supply
+
-
Receiver
+
-
Field
Terminals
ST 3000
250 ohm
Mill iammeter


Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments.

Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
The smart meter can be set to show the PV output in engineering units that are appropriate for your process
application. You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower
display limits settings for the smart meter’s digital readout using buttons on the face of the meter.
Using the Smart Meter
Follow these guidelines when configuring the smart meter:
If you initiate a command with the HART
©
communicator at the same time a button is pressed on the smart
meter, the smart meter will respond to the command it receives last. In other words, the last command
wins.
In most cases, you can press and release a button for one-shot operation, or press and hold a button for
continuous, 1/2 second, repetitive operation.
Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action is not initiated within one second.
And, if no action is taken within 30 seconds, the setup function will time out and the meter will return to
its previous state.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
183
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitter’s output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 for more
details on output conformity.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs.
The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the smart
meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration.
Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code

Smart Meter Code Engineering Unit Transmitter Output
Conformity
EU0 % * Linear or Square Root
EU1 in H
2
O *
EU2 mmHg *
EU3 PSI *
EU4 kPa †
EU5 MPa †
EU6 mbar † Linear
EU7 bar †
EU8 g/cm
2

EU9 kg/cm
2

EUA mmH
2
O †
EUB inHg †
EUC mH
2
O †
GPM * Square Root EUD
GPH * Square Root EUE
Custom † Linear or Square Root EUF
* These selections have indicators on smart meter display.
† Use stick-on labels provided for other engineering units.


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 184
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitter’s 0 to 100% output.
If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the lower or upper display limits. These
values are automatically set when you select the engineering units.
You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output
conformity. The lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root mode and
cannot be changed.
You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units
(EUF) and the transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.
When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either the lower or upper display limit setting
time out (after thirty seconds), the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous
settings. The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting, either
lower or upper, depending upon which limit you set first.
If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Tables A-6, A-7 and A-8 or Table A-9. See also “Meter/transmitter interaction” in this appendix.

Selecting Engineering Units
The procedure in Table A-6 outlines the steps for selecting the desired engineering units for a smart meter
using its local adjustments on the face of the meter. You will be selecting the unit of measurement that
you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation.



WARNING
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.

Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units

Step Action Result
1 Loosen lock on meter end-cap and unscrew cap
from housing. Be sure transmitter power is ON.


2 Press UNITS SET button. Display shows code for current engineering units
setting.
%
100 0
EU
ANALOG
%
0
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.




February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
185
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step Action Result
3



Press Increase o key to call up next code or
Decrease t key to call up previous code. Repeat
this action until desired code is on display.
You can hold down the Increase or Decrease key
to scroll forward or backward through the codes.
ATTENTION
Remember that if transmitter is configured for
SQUARE ROOT output conformity the only valid
code selections are: EU0 (%)
EUD(GPM)
EUE (GPH)
EUF (Custom)
If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output
conformity EU0 (%) to EUC and EUF (CUSTOM)
are valid code selections.
Selection codes for engineering units
%
100 0
EU
ANALOG
1
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
In H O
2
EU0 = %*
EU1 = inH
2
O*
EU2 = mmHg*
EU3 = PSI*
EU4 = KPa
EU5 = MPa
EU6 = mbar
EU7 = bar
EU8 = g/cm
2
EU9 = Kg/cm
2
EUA = mmH
2
O
EUB = inHg
EUC = mH
2
O
EUD = GPM*
EUE = GPH*
EUF = Custom
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
*These selections
have indicators on
the display.

4

Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected code.

ATTENTION
If you select an invalid code according to the
selections in Step 3, the meter display will show
an error code Er 1 for one second and then return
to the previous engineering units selection.
%
100 0
0. 1
ANALOG
8
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
In H O
2
Digital reading now
in engineering units
of inches of water

Goes blank for 1/2 second and returns with
reading in engineering units
5 If selected engineering unit does not match one of
six unit indicators on meter, peel off matching
stick-on unit label from sheet (drawing number
30756918-001) and paste it in lower right hand
corner of meter.
Use stick-on label for engineering units without
indicators on display.

%
100 0
1. 0
ANALOG
2
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
Kg/cm
2
Stick-on label
identifies selected
engineering units



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 186
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step Action Result
6 If you selected Custom or Flow engineering units,
go to Tables A-7 and A-8 to set lower and upper
display limits for smart meter display.
Lower and upper display limits have not been set
for custom or flow engineering units.
%
100 0
U
-
ANALOG
L
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
FLOW
GPM







Setting Lower and Upper Display Values
The table below shows the restrictions on setting the display values for given engineering units and output
conformity selections.

Engineering Output Set
Units code Conformity Lower Display Value? Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC
(Pressure type units)
Linear No (set automatically) No (set automatically)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF Square root No (fixed at zero) Yes
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom) Use Table A-8
EUF
(Custom)
Linear Yes
Use Table A-7
Yes
Use Table A-8

To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display perform the procedures in Tables A-7
and A-8. Also note that in each procedure you must:
First set the magnitude range for each display value. This enables the multiplier (K) on the display for
indicating larger ranges (greater than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or
right depending on the precision you want to show for that value).
Next set the display value. This procedure sets the display limit of the meter to represent minimum and
maximum transmitter output (0% and 100 % output).
Note: Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and lower (if applicable) display limits.
During normal operation the display range of the meter digital readout is ±19,990,000 and is automatically
ranged to provide the best precision possible for the digits available up to 1/100th of a unit.


ATTENTION

Please read through the entire procedure before beginning.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
187
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Setting Lower Display Values
The procedure in Table A-7 outlines the steps for setting the lower display limit to represent the 0 percent
(LRV) output of the transmitter.



ATTENTION
For example purposes, the procedures in Tables A-7 and A-8 assume that the lower value is
to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at 19,990,000 for a CUSTOM unit in a
transmitter with a LINEAR output, and the transmitter’s present output is exactly 50 percent.

Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Result
1


If lower limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.
You have completed units selection in Table A-6
and U- L appears on the display. Press LOWER
VALUE button to initiate lower display limit setting
function.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0. 0 0
Previously set
value flashes in
display and
indicator lights
KNOWN VALUE


ATTENTION
This procedure is only applicable for Custom
(EUF) engineering unit selection in a transmitter
configured for LINEAR output conformity.
The lower display value for transmitters configured
for SQUARE ROOT output conformity is fixed at
zero (0.00) and cannot be changed.

2 Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier (K)
for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal
point of the digital display left or right depending
on which button is pushed. The display shows
largest positive number for given range selection
so you can select a range that is just larger than
the range to be set for best display precision.
Display shows magnitude range selection.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
19.99




ATTENTION
The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the meter display limits. This selection does not
affect the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to
provide the best precision possible.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 188
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result
3 Press Increase o button to shift the decimal point
to the right and increase the magnitude range or
Decrease t button to shift the decimal point to the
left and decrease the magnitude range.
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display.
Also you can hold the respective key to scroll
forward or backward through the selections.


Magnitude range selections.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
19. 9 9
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
reading on the display.

4 Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower
display value setting.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless lower value was set before.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
189
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result
5 Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.

6 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in first digit
and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless lower value was set before.

7 Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.

8 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in second
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless lower value was set before.
First digit value setting.

%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values

9 Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.

Third digit value setting.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0 0 0.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values



10 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in third digit
and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1 before.

11 Press Increase o button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease t button to set it to BLANK.

12 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in “1” digit
and activate sign segment.
Readout now displays sign segment which will be
BLANK for positive values unless lower value was
set for negative (–) values before.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 190
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
191
Step Action Result
13 Press Increase o button to set sign segment to
minus sign for negative values or Decrease t
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.

14


Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in current
settings as lower display value limit.
ATTENTION
For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR
output, you must set both lower and upper display
limits for values to take effect. If you let either the
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30
seconds), the meter discards both newly set
values and reverts back to the previously set
values.
Sign segment setting.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
0 0 0.
Press to set sign
segment as minus
sign (-) for negative
values
Press to set sign
segment as
BLANK for
positive values


-
-
If you have not yet set the upper display limit value, the meter automatically enters the upper display
setting function after it displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-8.
If you have already set the upper display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter. Meter returns to normal operation.





Setting Upper Display Values
The procedure in Table A-8 outlines the steps for setting the upper display limit to represent the 100
percent (URV) output of the transmitter.



ATTENTION
This procedure applies only for Flow units (GPM or GPH) in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output conformity, or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or
square root output conformity.


Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display

Step Action Result
1 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
display limit setting function.
If upper limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.




Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step Action Result
2 Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier
(K) for indicating larger ranges and shifts the
decimal point of the digital display left or right
depending on which button is pushed. The
display shows largest positive number for given
range selection so you can select a range that is
just larger than the range to be set for best display
precision.
Display shows magnitude range selection.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
19.99




ATTENTION
The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits. This selection does not affect
the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to provide
the best precision possible.

3 Press Increase o button to shift the decimal point
to the right and increase the magnitude range or
Decrease t button to shift the decimal point to the
left and decrease the magnitude range.
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display. For example purposes only, largest
range 19990K is selected in this procedure.
Also you can hold the respective key to scroll
forward or backward through the selections.

Magnitude range selections with largest range
selected.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
reading on the display.
K
19990

4 Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
value setting.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless upper value was set before.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
00

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 192
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons

Step Action Result
5 Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
First digit value setting is set to 9.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display
– use 9 for example purposes.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
90
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values


6 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in first digit
and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless upper value was set before.

7
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
090

Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.

8 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in second
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless upper value was set before.

% 100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
0990



February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
193
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step Action Result
9 Press Increase o button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease t button to select
the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display
– use 9 for example purposes.

10 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in third digit
and activate next active digit.
Next digit value setting is set to 9.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be BLANK unless upper value was set to 1 before.

%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
9990
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values

11 Press Increase o button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease t button to set it to BLANK.
“1” digit value setting is set to 1.

% 100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
9990
Press to set " 1"
digit as 1
Press to set " 1"
digit as BLANK
1


12 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in “1” digit
and activate sign segment.

Readout now displays sign segment which will be
BLANK for positive values unless upper value was
set for negative (–) values before.
13 Press Increase o button to set sign segment to
minus sign for negative values or Decrease t
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.

%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
9990 1
Sign segment
is BLANK for
positive values
and minus sign
for negative
values



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 194
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
195
Step Action Result
14



Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in current
settings as upper display value and return to
previous display. Upper display limit setting is now
complete.

For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR
output, you must set both lower and upper display
limits for values to take effect. If you let either the
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30
seconds), the meter discards both newly set
values and reverts back to the previously set
values.

Display goes blank for a 1/2 second and returns to
display readout equal to 50% output.
In this example, readout is 9, 990,000 CUSTOM
unit for 50% display range of 0 to 19,990,000
CUSTOM for transmitter with LINEAR output.
%
100 0
ANALOG
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
K
9990

-
-
-
If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
LINEAR output mode, the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it
displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-7, Step 3.
If you have already set the lower display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode. Meter returns
to normal operation.
If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output mode, this completes the limit setting function. Meter returns to normal
operation.



Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Setting smart meter display using the HART
©
communicator
Using the Hart Communicator to Configure the Smart Meter Display
You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower limit settings
for the smart meter’s digital readout using the HART
©
communicator. Use the procedure in Table A-9 to
setup the smart meter display with the HART
©
communicator.
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitter’s output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 in this
User manual for more details.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs. Refer to Table A-5 also for meter set up restrictions.
1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the
smart meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent (%) and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity
configuration.
2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitter’s 0 to 100% output. The table below shows the restrictions on setting display
values for given engineering units and output conformity selections.

Engineering Output Set
Units code Conformity Lower Display Value? Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC
(Pressure type units)
Linear No (set automatically) No (set automatically)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)
Square root No (fixed at zero) Yes
Custom Linear Yes Yes


3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Table A-9. See also “Meter/transmitter interaction” in this appendix.



ATTENTION
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 196
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
197
Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART
©
communicator

Step Action
1 Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2 From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
-
-
-
Device setup
Basic setup
Local meter
3 The “Local meter” display will appear.
ST3000:PT 3011
Local meter
1
2
Installed
Units %
Yes
HELP SAVE HOME




ATTENTION
You can set up the smart meter display using this procedure even if the meter is not installed
in the transmitter.

4 Determine whether the current engineering unit (Units) for the meter display is correct for your
process application.
-
-
If it is correct, press HOME (end of procedure).
If not, determine the desired engineering unit for the meter display from Table A-5.
Also determine the correct output conformity selection (Linear or Square Root) for the
transmitter output and meter EU. See Table A-5 for EU and output conformity selections.
5
To change output conformity:
Press the left arrow key to show the “Basic setup” display.
6 Scroll down to highlight “PV xfer fnctn” (Output conformity) and select it by pressing the right
arrow key. The “Transfer function” display appears.
Select the correct Transfer function (Linear or Square root) and press ENTER. Press SEND to
download change to the transmitter.
7 You will be warned that pressing OK will change device output. Press OK.
8 When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.
The communicator will return to the “Basic setup” display.
9
To change engineering units for meter display:
Scroll up to highlight “Local meter” and select it by pressing the right arrow key.
10



Select “Units” by pressing the number 2 key.
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Step Action
11 Scroll through the list of engineering units using the up and down arrow keys and select the
desired units, then press ENTER. The available units are listed below for reference.
% mbar mH2O
inH2O bar gal/min
mmHg g/Sqcm gal/h
psi kg/Sqcm Custom
kPa mmH2O
MPa inHg
Note: Be sure that the engineering unit that is selected is compatible with the output
conformity selection in Table A-5.
12 Press SEND to download change to the transmitter.
13 If “Upper” and “Lower” appear on the screen, select Upper and enter the upper limit value for
the meter display. Press ENTER.
Select Lower and enter the lower limit value for the meter display. Press ENTER.
Note: If square root output conformity is selected, the lower display limit is fixed at zero and
cannot be changed.
14 Press SEND to download changes to the transmitter.




ATTENTION
If an error message appears,
“Invalid unit occurred writing Units. Restore device value?” or
“Invalid meter option occurred writing Lower. Restore device value?”
You have tried to download an invalid parameter for the meter display.


ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 198
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Typical smart meter indications
Typical smart meter indications
Table A-10 summarizes typical smart meter indications. Note that other combinations of status messages
are possible.
Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications.
Meter Indication What It Means Meter Indication What It Means

% 100 0

No power
applied.
% 100 0
- - -

Meter has
detected
transmitter output
that is not-a-
number.
% 100 0
20
ANALOG
In H O
2
0

Normal display
for transmitter in
Analog mode with
digital readout in
inches of water.
Display range is
Over Limit.
Transmitter output
is over 200%.
% 100 0
O
-
L
K GPM

(O-L is alternately
displayed with the
200% value in
engineering units.)
%
100 0
FLOW
GPM K
9990

Normal display
for transmitter in
HART
©
mode
and square root
output. Digital
readout is gallons
per minute with
1000 multiplier.
Transmitter is in
output mode.
Bargraph and
readout show
value that was
entered through
the communicator.
% 100 0
100.0
%
OUTPUT MODE

Transmitter in
HART
©
mode is
in non-critical
status. Displayed
value may not be
valid. If display is
“- - -” instead of a
value, transmitter
is in critical
status.
% 100 0
200.0
%

Input pressure
equal to or greater
than 200%.
Display flashes
between 200% (or
corresponding
value in EU) and
O-L. Transmitter
locks output at
200% and will go
no higher
regardless of input.
% 100 0
77.9
%
CHECK STATUS

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
199
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Operation error codes
Operation error codes
Table A-11 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean.

Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions.
If error indication is . . . Then, it means
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
% 100 0
ANALOG
Er 0

You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a Series
100 transmitter that does not support this option.

%
100 0
E r
ANALOG
%
1
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.

You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a
transmitter in square root mode (FLOW) or have tried to set a
flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in linear mode
(pressure). After this error is displayed, the meter will return to
the unit # (EU#) of the engineering unit it was displaying before
the set function was invoked. You may then select another unit
or exit in the normal fashion.

%
100 0
E r
ANALOG
%
2
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.

You have tried to select a process variable for the transmitter
using the VAR SEL. button. The Variable Select button is non-
functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter.

%
100 0
E r
ANALOG
%
3
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.

You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for pressure
type engineering units (EU1 to EUC), or Lower display limit for
flow type engineering units (EUD, EUE) or CUSTOM unit (EUF)
in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output. Or, you
have tried to set upper display limit for flow or Custom unit in
transmitter with SQUARE ROOT output and URV set to zero (0).
In SQUARE ROOT mode, the transmitter’s URV cannot equal
zero. The Lower and Upper display limits only apply for
CUSTOM (EUF) unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR
output. The Upper display limit also applies for FLOW (EUD,
EUE) and CUSTOM (EUF) units with transmitter in SQUARE
ROOT mode, but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) and
cannot be changed.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 200
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Meter/transmitter interaction

If error indication is . . . Then, it means
You have tried to set a span value that is outside acceptable
limits for your transmitter.
UPPER
VALUE
UNITS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
% 100 0
ANALOG
Er 4

%
100 0
E r
ANALOG
%
5
UPPER
VALUE
UNI TS
LOWER
VALUE
SET
VAR
SEL.

You have tried to invoke a smart meter set function with the
transmitter’s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only position. You
cannot make changes in the smart meter settings when the
transmitter’s configuration is write protected.

Meter/transmitter interaction


ATTENTION

After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.

Transmitter power cycling
Cycling transmitter power OFF/ON will have no affect on meter configuration. The meter digital readout
will be in the previously set engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be intact
when transmitter power is restored.
Changing output conformity
If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE ROOT to LINEAR, the meter’s digital
readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the FLOW indicator
will go out when the change is downloaded to the transmitter.
Likewise, if you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT, the
meter’s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the
FLOW indicator will light when the change is downloaded to the transmitter. In either case, you must
reconfigure the smart meter display as outlined in Table A-9 of this manual.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
201
- Meter/transmitter interaction

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 202
Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet -


Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet

ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter
with HART
©
Communications
Configuration Record Sheet
Model Number: ______________________________________________
Series: ___________________________
Measurement Type: DP GP AP
Measurement Range: __________________________________
Mode of Operation: ________________________
Tag Number: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Long Tag: __________________________________
PV Unit (Engineering Units): inH2O inHg ftH2O mmH2O
mmHg psi bar mbar g/Sq cm
kg/Sq cm Pa kPa torr atm
MPa inH2O @ 4 degC mmH2O @ 4 degC
inH2O @ 60 degF
PV LRV (Lower Range Value): 4mAdc = _____________________
PV URV (Upper Range Value): 20 mAdc = _____________________
PV Transfer Function (Output Conformity): Linear Square Root
PV Damping time (Seconds): 0.00 0.16 0.32 0.48
1.00 2.00 4.00 8.00
16.0 32.0
SV Unit (Secondary variable): deg C deg F deg R K
PV AO Alarm Type (Failsafe Direction): Upscale (Hi) Downscale (Lo)
Write Protect Option: Read and Write Read only
Poll Address ________

Configured By: _______________________________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
203
-
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 204




Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters
Problem
When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point
(32°F/0°C), pressure transmitters and their piping require freeze protection. Transmitters may also require
continuous heating, if the process fluid is tar, wax, or other medium which will solidify at normal ambient.
However, uncontrolled steam or electric heating, in addition to wasting energy, can cause errors and
accidentally destroy the transmitter.
Possible Solutions/Methods
Solution
These two basic solutions are possible:
Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact
with transmitter.
Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze-ups
under the coldest conditions.
The following paragraphs in this appendix describe a number of methods for implementing both solutions.
Sealing liquid method
The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse
piping to the process. The small contact (interface) area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid
reduces the mixing of the two fluids.
You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing.
It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing at
the site, including the heated interface.


WARNING

The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid.

A reliable sealing liquid is a 50/50 percent (by volume) solution of ethylene-glycol and water. This solution
has a specific gravity of 1.070 at 60°F (15°C), a freezing temperature of –34°F (–36°C), and a boiling
temperature of +225°F (+106°C) at atmospheric pressure. Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile
coolant systems such as Prestone and
Zerex are solutions of ethylene-glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added; they may
be used in place of pure ethylene-glycol.
Another sealing liquid, used in many chemical plants, is dibutylphalate an oily-type liquid with a specific
gravity of 1.045 at 70°F (21°C). It has a boiling point 645°F (340°C) and does not freeze so it can be used
down to about –20°F (–30°C).
Figures C-1 and C-2 show typical piping installations for this method. The process fluid must be heated
above its freezing point. This is frequently done by lagging in (insulating) the connecting nipple, shut-off
valve and “T” connector with the process piping. Where the process piping itself requires heating, a steam
or electric trace is run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing
liquid.
5/08 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual 205
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
standard type
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
Differential
pressure
transmitter
Process pressure
transmitter
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long


Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity
Heavier Than Process Fluid.




1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
Process pressure
transmitter
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" shut-off
valve (thru port
type desirable)
1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6"
long
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
Make both HP and LP
connections as shown.


Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter
Than Process Fluid.
The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the sealing liquid is at its required
specific gravity.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 206
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Purging
Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse
lines to pressure, level, or flow transmitters. The bubbler system, using a constant-air flow regulator, is
particularly common on open tank liquid level applications. No heating of impulse lines or transmitter is
required, but normal precautions are required to keep water out of the air supply system.
Gas applications
We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas
flow or pressure. Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications, the
simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining. This means that the
impulse lines are connected to the lowest point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped
downward at least one inch per foot. (Side-connected transmitters with vent-drains at a lower point in the
meter body must be regularly checked to assure condensate removal.) If the transmitter is located below the
process taps (not recommended), piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and
then up to the process as shown in Figure C-3. Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent
pipe rupture due to freezing.


Transmitter

Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow.

Mechanical (diaphragm) seals
Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive, yet broadest application of all the
methods. Similar in principle to the liquid seals, diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid
carry-over into the process fluid. This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full
and equal liquid seal legs. Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from –34° to
600°F (–36° to 315°C) at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure
viscosity of tars and similar high-freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions.
You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the
fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area. In general,
conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special
large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements.
You can lag (insulate) impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process piping, but this practice is only
common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1/2-inch impulse
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
207
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
lines. Use a tank-mounted flanged seal in such installations. Otherwise, it is more desirable to keep the
capillary lengths short, the transmitter accessible for maintenance, and (for flow applications) the normal 3-
valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks. Thus, the impulse lines,
valving and diaphragm seals with 1/2-inch connections would be electrically or steam traced, with high
temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter. Figures C-4 and C-5 show typical piping
layouts.


The impulse piping, 3-valve
manifold, and upper flanges
of the metal diaphragm seals
must be insulated and, where
required, also heated by
electric or steam.
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type with
suitable temperature rating)
Differential pressure
transmitter with metal
diaphragm seals

Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seals.


Process pressure
transmitter with
metal diaphragm
seal
Pipe union or
coupling
Shut-off valve
Impulse piping, shut-off valve, and
diaphragm seal distance must be as
short as possible and insulated along
with the process pipe or vessel

Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seal.

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 208
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Electric heating
Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces (bodies) than at their
electronics. Normally, it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250°F (107 to 121°C)
without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics (normally 200°F/93°C).
Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200°F (93°C) can
assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180°F (82°C) while assuring safe transmitter operation. For
water or similar lower-temperature mediums, the control can be set at 50°F (10°C) to save energy and call
for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require.
Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled, continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0°F (–
18°C) and 20 mph wind velocity, while not exceeding 225°F (107°C) at the transmitter body at 90°F
(32°C) ambient and zero wind velocity. The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the
high initial cost of the thermostat systems. Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100°F (38°C)
without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body
temperature rating under opposite extremes.
Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and
containing electrical heating elements and thermostats, certain precautions are required with such
arrangements. Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats. Also
thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the
meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat
setting is lower.
Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I, Group D, Division I and II
installations.
The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered. For this reason, we recommend using alarm
devices with manual acknowledgment and reset. Figures C-6 and C-7 show typical piping installations.


Electric heating cable
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Differential pressure
transmitter
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Temperature
sensor
Insulated enclosure

Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating and Control.

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
209
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Temperature
sensor
Insulated
enclosure
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Electric heating
cable

Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating Control.

Steam heating
Steam heating is perhaps the most common, yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting
transmitters from freeze-ups. Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation, it is
considered an available by-product. The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter
meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure. We recommend that you
review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding of the
temperature problem with steam heating. In brief, do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274°F (134°C) and
cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250°F (121°C). With steam heating, as with electrical, you should
use insulated transmitter body housing, impulse piping and valves.
It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating systems. They permit live,
superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap. You should also use conventional
steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warm-
day conditions. If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate
in the piping, they could freeze at low temperatures.
All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program. Dirt, scale, and water softeners will cause traps to
stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam, allowing
condensate freeze-up in cold weather. When steam traps are used for cold-weather freeze protection of
water lines, a thermostat controlled steam supply valve, which will shut off the steam at ambient
temperatures higher than 50°F (10°C), will save steam and prevent overheating.
A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which throttles condensate flow based on
its temperature. This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure, assuring
temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure. Models are available to set the
condensate temperature from about 70° to 200°F (21° to 93°C). They must be located within 6 to 12 inches
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 210
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
(15 to 30 cm) of the transmitter body and, like all steam traps, they also require periodic maintenance. The
engineering of this type system is more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss
upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam/water
interface. It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line, thus affecting the heating
efficiency within the insulated enclosure. Therefore, steam control of materials which freeze or become too
viscous above 100°F (38°C) should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the
specific piping layout used.
Uncontrolled steam heating, even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam, should not
be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100°F (38°C), since this type of fixed Btu input must
either over or under-heat under normal ambient swings.
As with electric heating, there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant
heaters, hollow meter body studs or just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body. The
same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions.
Figures C-8 and C-9 show typical piping installations. Table C-1 summarizes the temperature ranges for
the various freeze protection systems.

Steam heat
tracer line
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Differential pressure
transmitter
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
Insulated enclosure
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
Shut-off valve
Steam Supply (low pressure)

Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.


February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
211
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
Insulated enclosure
Shut-off valve
Steam Supply (low pressure)
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Steam heat
tracer line

Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.

Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems
Operating
Temperature
Range
Liquid Seals
Ethylene
Glycol
Dibutyl-
Phthalate
Steam Heating
No Seals
Trap CTV
Valve
Electric Heat
No
Control
Thermo-
stated
o
F
o
C
34
20
50
100
200
225
325
600
36
30
10
38
93
106
163
315
Note: Broken lines indicate areas of caution.
Diaphragm
Seals



ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 212
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Superheated steam considerations
We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212°F (100°C) only at the normal atmospheric pressure
of about 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (psia). If the pressure of steam is increased above 14.7 psia,
the temperature of the steam is also increased. For example, if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch
gage (psig), the steam temperature is 274°F (134°C).
On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications, we may be required to use steam to heat the
impulse piping to the flow or pressure transmitter, as well as the transmitter itself. For these applications,
we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used. As an example, assume that steam at 100 psig
saturated (338°F/170°C) is to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system. Too frequently, it is
assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274°F (134°C), the temperature of saturated
steam at 30 psig. Wrong! A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam
temperature.
In our example, we were talking about saturated steam in the main header from the boiler. But modern
industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack. After reaching the boiling point in the
drum, the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit, extracting additional
heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure.
This is superheat and, depending on boiler design, it may amount to 50 to 300°F (10 to 149°C) above the
saturated steam temperature. It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission
from the process. Thus, in the typical application, the problem of steam heating is compounded by the
additional superheat in the main header.
Specifically, when steam is reduced in pressure, it retains about the same latent heat or the same
Btu’s/pound at the reduced pressure. Therefore, in our example, steam at 100 psig and 338°F (170°C) when
reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306°F (152°C) or a loss of only 32°F (18°C).
This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater. This device mixes cold water with
the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btu’s per pound of water (steam). It is also
possible to use temperature controlled steam traps, which actually allow the steam to condense to water and
therefore reduce its temperature to a pre-set value.
Table C-2 lists the various values of steam pressure, saturated steam temperatures at these pressures,
degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is
reduced to 30 psig steam.

Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values
Pressure
(1)
Saturated
Temperature
(2)
Superheat Added (3) Final Steam
Temperature
(2) + (3)
Actual Temperature
of Steam When
Reduced From (1)*
to 30 psig
psig °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C
50 298 147 None None 298 147 290 143
100 338 170 100 55 438 225 420 215
150 366 185 120 66 486 251 460 234
200 387 198 150 83 537 281 500 260
400 448 231 200 111 648 342 600 316
600 489 254 250 139 739 393 660 349
* (1) equals pressure in column one with superheat added.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
213
-
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 214



Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - Introduction
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications
Introduction
Reference information
Information is provided to clarify the Hazardous Location installation requirements in North America and
internationally. An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided.
North American Hazardous Location Standards
NEC and CEC electrical codes
Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified) locations of the United States is conducted
under the provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500, and within
Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.
Classes
Hazardous (classified) locations, in both the United States and Canada, are categorized into one of three
classes:
Class I - Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce
explosive or ignitable mixtures
Class II - Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains
Class III - Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings
Divisions
The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present:
Division 1 - Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors - or combustible
dust in suspension – are continuously, intermittently or periodically present under normal
operating conditions.
Division 2 - Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but normally confined within
closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault
conditions. Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into
suspension.
Examples
Given the criteria above, the following examples are made:
Class III, Division 1 - A class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or
material processing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured or used.
Class III, Division 2 - A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are
stored or handled.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
215
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Group classifications
Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the
energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable mixture within air. Group classifications are as follows:


Class I Group Classifications
Group A - Atmospheres containing acetylene.
Group B - Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases
containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume, or gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group C - Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of
equivalent hazard.
Group D - Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane, cyclopropane,
ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha,
propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.


Class II Group Classifications

Group E - Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum,
magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similarly
hazardous characteristics.
Group F - Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon
black, charcoal, coal or other dusts that have been sensitized by other
materials so that they present an explosion hazard.
Group G - Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F,
including flour, wood, grain, and other dusts of similarly hazardous
characteristics.

Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in the given locations.

Protection
Concept
Designation Permitted Use Principle

Explosionproof XP Division 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches
flame

Intrinsic Safety IS Division 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under normal
and fault conditions

Pressurized Type X and Y Division 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out
Pressurized Type Z Division 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out

Nonincendive NI Division 1 & 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces
under normal conditions

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 216
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous (classified) location must also be
classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as
referenced to either 40 °C or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment (whichever is greater). The
maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous
atmosphere present. The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-1.
Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC)

Maximum Temperature Identification

Degrees C Degrees F Number

450
300
280
260
230
842
572
536
500
446
T1
T2
T2A
T2B
T2C

215
200
180
165
160
419
392
356
329
320
T2D
T3
T3A
T3B
T3C
135 275 T4
120 248 T4A
100 212 T5
85 185 T6



Intrinsically safe apparatus parameters
Vmax = Maximum safe voltage which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Imax = Maximum safe current which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Ci = Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.
Li = Unprotected inductance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
217
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 218
Associated apparatus parameters
Voc = Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
voltage is the maximum from a single channel.
Isc = Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum from a single channel.
*Vt = Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location.
This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
*It = Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
Ca = Maximum capacitance which can be connected to the apparatus.
La = Maximum inductance which can be connected to the apparatus.
*CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time
Entity concept
Under entity requirements, the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated
apparatus, not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the
voltage (Vmax) and current (Imax), which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically
safe, considering faults, must be equal to or greater than the voltage (Voc or Vt) and current (Isc or It)
levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults and applicable factors. In
addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus,
including interconnecting wiring, must be less than or equal to the capacitance (Ca) and inductance (La)
which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus. If these criteria are met, then the combination
may be connected and remain intrinsically safe. Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters as
listed in Tables D-2, D-3 and D-4 below:
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval

Code Description
1C -
-
-
-
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D. Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G. Suitable for Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals required
within 18” of enclosure, Group A only.
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient, when
connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D; Suitable for Classes II & III,
Division 2, Groups F & G, T4 at 93°C maximum ambient, hazardous locations. 42 Vdc
max.
Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (NEMA 4X).

Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
219
Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters

Intrinsic Safety
Entity Parameters
(1)

Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,
Groups A- G
V
Max
s 30 V
I
Max
= 225 mA
P
Max
= 1.2 W
C
i
= 4.2 nF
L
i
= 0 With no integral indicator, or with
integral smart meter option SM
L
i
= 150 µH With analog meter option ME
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

Code Description
2J -
-
-
-
Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D. Dust-Ignition-Proof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals not required. 42 Vdc
max.
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G; Class III,
Divisions 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient.
Install per Honeywell drawing 51450806.
Suitable for Class I, II & III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F & G hazardous locations, T4
at 93°C. 42 Vdc max.
Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (Encl 4X).


CSA Certified Barriers
(1)
Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,
Groups


30V / 300 O
28V / 200 O
20V / 150 O

A - G


(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51450806.



Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
IEC Classification of hazardous locations
The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus identified. These recommendations are found within IEC 79-0 through 79-15 and 79-28.
For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries (CENELEC member states), the European
Standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus. They were established on the basis of the IEC Recommendations, however in
comparison they are much more detailed.
Zones
Defined within IEC 7-10, Hazardous locations are categorized into three zones:
Zone 0 - Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously, or is present for long periods.
Zone 1 - Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation.
Zone 2 - Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and, if it does occur, it
will exist for a short period only.
Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and mists are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the
most easily ignitable mixture within air. Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used
within as follows:
Group IIC - Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group IIB - Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Group IIA - Atmospheres such as acetone, benzene, butane, cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane,
methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 220
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations.
Protection
Concept
Designation Permitted Use Principle
Flameproof d Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Intrinsic Safety ia Zone 0, 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under 2 faults.
Intrinsic Safety ib Zone 1 & 2 Limit energy of sparks under 1 fault.
Pressurized p Zone 1 Keeps flammable gas out.
Encapsulation m Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out.
Increased Safety e Zone 1 & 2 No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces.
Powder Filled q Zone 1 & 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Oil Immersion o Zone 1 & 2 Keeps flammable gas out.
non-sparking nA No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces under
normal conditions.
Enclosed Break nC Zone 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limit energy of sparks and surface
temperature under normal conditions.
Restricted
Breathing
nR Zone 2 Keeps flammable gas out.

Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous location must also be classified for the
maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the
maximum operating ambient of the equipment. The maximum surface temperature must be less than the
minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall be
indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-3.
Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC)

Maximum Temperature Identification

Degrees C Degrees F Number

450
300
200
135
842
572
392
275
100 212
185
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
85 T6

February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
221
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
Certification and conformity details

If Code is. . . Then, transmitter option is . . .
1C FM approval body certification for:
• Explosionproof/Flameproof Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D
• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
2J CSA approval body certification for :
• Explosionproof Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
CA IECEx approval body certification for :
• Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC

Z2
ZD
ZA
(Multiple Marketing)
SAEx approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC
• Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: Ex ia IIC
• Flameproof Zone 1: Ex d IIC

3S

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0: , Ex ia II C
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 1: , Ex ia IIC

33

ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:
• Dust-tight Zone 0: , Ex tD A20 IP6X
• Flameproof and Dust-tight Zone 1: , Ex d IIC, Ex tD A21 IP6X

3N
ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:
• Non-Sparking, Zone 2:
,
Ex nA IIC, Ex tD A22 IP6X
ATEX (LCIE) approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1:, Ex ia IIC, Ex tD A20 IP6X 3C
(Multiple
Marketing)
• Flameproof Zone 1: , Ex d IIC, Ex tD A21 IP6X
• Non-Sparking, Zone 2: , Ex ia IIC, Ex tD A22 IP6X
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 222
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
CERTUSP INMETRO (Brazil) approval body certification for:
• Flameproof Zone 1: BR-Ex d IIC
6D
• Intrinsically Safe Zone 0/1: BR-Ex ia IIC
6S
9X No certification
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
223
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - Enclosure Ratings
Enclosure Ratings
NEMA and IEC Recognition
The NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association) enclosure classifications are recognized in the
US. The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the
world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications. The following paragraphs provide a
discussion of the comparison between NEMA enclosure type numbers and IEC enclosure classification
designations.
IEC Classifications
IEC Publication 529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures, provides a system
for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by
the enclosure. IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment,
risk of explosion, or conditions such as moisture (produced for example by condensation), corrosive
vapors, fungus, or vermin.
IEC Designations
Basically, the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals. The first characteristic
numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid
foreign objects entering the enclosure. The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection
provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water.
NEMA Standards
NEMA Standards Publication 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), does test
for environmental conditions such as corrosion, rust, icing, oil, and coolants. For this reason, and because
the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical, the IEC enclosure classification
designations cannot be exactly equated with NEMA enclosure type numbers.
Table D-4 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC enclosure
classification designations. The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC
classifications; for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA
types.
Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure
Classification

NEMA Enclosure
Type Number
IEC Enclosure
Classification Designation
1 IP 10
2 IP 11
3 IP 54
3R IP 14
3S IP 54
4 and 4X IP 56
5 IP 52
6 and 6P IP 67
12 and 12K IP 52
13 IP 54
NOTE: This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 224
- Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical
Systems
Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class I,
Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical Systems
ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual
Seal” devices in accordance with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing between
Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids.
Accordingly, the ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure Transmitters comply with the
sealing requirements of NEC Chapter 5. Special Occupancies, Article 500 — Hazardous (Classified)
Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2, Article 501 — Class I Locations, Article 501-15,
Sealing and Drainage, (f) Drainage, (3) Canned Pumps, Process or Service Connections, Etc., Article 505
— Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations, Article 505-16, Sealing and Drainage, (E) Drainage, (3) Canned
Pumps, Process, or Service Connections, and So Forth., and the Canadian Electrical Code rules 18-092, 18-
108, 18-158, J18-108 and J18-158.
Annunciation of a primary seal failure per ANSI/ISA–12.27.01 is electronic and is displayed in various
forms based on the type of communication used for the particular transmitter. Failure of the primary seal is
considered a Critical Failure. Based on testing annunciation of primary seal failure will occur in 7 hours or
less.
The transmitter’s 4-20 mA output will be driven to the selected failsafe direction – upscale or downscale.
The transmitter’s digital output (DE, HART
©
, Fieldbus) will display any of the following responses which
could indicate a primary seal failure as well as other meter body faults.
METER BODY FAULT, MB OVERLOAD, SUSPECT INPUT, SENSOR FAILURE, DEVICE
FAILURE.











February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
225
-

ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 226
Index -
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
227
Index
A
Analog meter connections, 38
Approvals, 36
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 183
Factory Mutual (FM), 182
B
Barrier diaphragms, 127
inspecting and cleaning, 127
C
Calibration
analog output signal, 138
range, 139
reset, 142
Certification
CENELEC / LCIE, 186
Standards Australia (LOSC), 186
Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity, 187
Communication errors, 148
Communications
request/response format, 7
starting, 44
transmitter/communicator, 7
Communicator
connections, 79
connections to transmitter, 43
disconnecting, 75
keyboard, 58
memory module or data pack, 49
Software compatibility, 41
viewing/entering device information, 68
Configuration
device information, 68
LRV and URV, 66
PV damping, 72
PV engineering units, 65
PV transfer function (output conformity), 70
SV units (meter body temperature), 73
tag number, 64
Configuration data
reviewing, 45
Configuration database, 49
Configuration parameter summary, 51
Constant-current source mode, 78
Critical failures
clearing critical failures, 151
D
Damping time, 72
adjusting, 72
Damping Time Constant, 52
Database
save/restore, 109
Device Information, 52
Diagnostic messages, 146
communication errors, 146
critical failures, 146
non-critical failures, 146
Diaphragm seals, 171
E
Electric heating, 173
Electrical codes
IEC and CENELEC, 184
NEC and CEC, 179
EMC Directive, 13
Enclosure Ratings, 187
Enclosures
IEC classification, 188
NEMA standards, 188
Engineering units, 65
pre-programmed, 65
selecting, 65
F
Failsafe direction, 105
Failure mode alarm
jumper, 46
Flange adapter
installing, 33
Flange connections
description, 32
Flange mounted transmitter, 26
Mounting, 26
Flow engineering units
Smart meter, 148
Flow measurement application, 80
Freeze protection, 169
H
HART 5 275 Communicator
menu summary, 55
HART 6 375 Communicator
menu summary, 57
Hazardous location installation, 37
Hazardous location requirements, 179
Index -
J
Jumpers
failsafe direction, 46
repositioning procedure, 105
L
Lightning Protection, 37
Liquid level measurement application, 96
differential pressure (DP), 85, 87
gauge pressure (GP), 90
remote diaphragm seals, 96
Local smart meter options, 10
Local zero and span
adjusting (procedure), 144
Loop wiring, 38
LRV, 66
keying in, 66
setting to applied pressure, 67
LRV (Lower Range Value), 51
M
Maintenance routines, 127
Master reset, 151
Meter body
replacing, 133
Model number
format, 4
Mounting
suggested location, 30
Mounting area
considerations, 14
Mounting transmitter
bracket mounting, 18
flange mounting, 26
flush mounting, 24
Models STA122, STA922, 21
remote diaphragm seal mounting, 27
Multidrop mode, 52, 74
N
Non-critical failures, 147
Nonvolatile memory, 49
O
Operation
data access, 101
Operation data, 101
failsafe output direction, 104
input pressure, 102
message (or scratchpad) area, 104
output, 102, 103
temperature, 104
upper and lower range limits, 103
Output conformity, 52, 70
selecting, 70
Output conformity and smart meter configuration, 148
Output meter options, 38
Output mode, 78
P
Parts identification, 152
Piping, 29
guidelines, 32
Poll address, 52, 74, 75
Potential noise sources, 14
Power supply voltage
operating range, 34
Pressure measurement application
absolute pressure (AP), 93
differential pressure (DP), 82
gauge pressure (GP), 90
Pressure ratings, 16
Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
replacing, 130
Process connections
summary, 31
Process head bolt
torque ratings, 130
PV engineering unit, 51
R
Recommended spare parts, 171
Restore database, 111
S
Sealing liquid, 169
SM 3000 smart meter connections, 39
Smart meter
configuration and output conformity, 148
configuration using meter pushbuttons, 147
engineering units code, 148
error codes, 165
indications, 164
meter/transmitter interaction, 166
selecting engineering units, 149
setting display of LRV (using meter pushbuttons), 151
setting display of URV (using meter pushbuttons), 155
setting display using HART communicator, 161
Smart meter display, 47
description, 141
operating conditions and specifications, 143
Smart meter option (option SM), 140
Software version compatibility, 41
Solution Support Center, iv
Span, 66, 67
Square root dropout, 71
Square root output, 70
ST 3000 smart transmitter, 2
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual February 2012 228
Index -
February 2012 ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
229
Start-up, 77
AP transmitter
pressure measurement application, 93
DP transmitter
flow measurement application, 80
liquid level measurement application, 85, 87
pressure measurement application, 82
DP transmitter (remote seals)
liquid level measurement application, 96
GP transmitter
liquid level measurement application, 90
pressure measurement application, 90
Start-up tasks reference, 12
Static electricity damage, 105
Status, 103
clearing critical status, 151
Steam heating, 174
Superheated steam considerations, 177
T
Tag number, 51, 64
Temperature Limits
Operating, 14
Three-valve manifold
piping, 29
Torque ratings, 130
Transmitter
failure mode alarm jumper, 46
mounting, 17
operating temperature limits, 14
piping, 29
pressure ratings, 16
start-up, 77
wiring, 34
write protection option, 46
Transmitter models, 5
Transmitter types, 4
Turndown Ratio, 72
U
URV, 66
keying in, 66
setting to applied pressure, 67
URV (Upper Range Value), 51
V
Vibration sources, 14
W
Wiring transmitter
connections, 35
Working memory, 49
Write protection option, 105
Writing data in the message area, 108
Z
Zero and span adjust options, 10
Zero corrects, 21
Zero shift, 21




Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact one of the offices below.

ASIA PACIFIC
(TAC)
hfs-tac-
support@honeywell.com

Australia
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax:
1300-36-04-70

China – PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826

Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033

South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6114
Fax: +(822) 792 9015

EMEA
Honeywell Process
Solutions,
Phone: + 80012026455 or
+44 (0)1202645583
FAX: +44 (0) 1344 655554
Email: (Sales)
sc-cp-apps-
salespa62@honeywell.com
or
(TAC)
hfs-tac-
support@honeywell.com














NORTH AMERICA
Honeywell Process
Solutions,
Phone: 1-800-423-9883
Or 1-800-343-0228

Email: (Sales)
ask-ssc@honeywell.com
or

SOUTH AMERICA
Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
Phone: +(55-11) 7266-1900
FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905

Email: (Sales)
Honeywell Process Solutions
Honeywell 34-ST-25-17
512 Virginia Drive February 2012
Fort Washington, PA 19034 ©2011 Honeywell International Inc.
www.honeywellprocess.com
(TAC)
hfs-tac-
support@honeywell.com


ask-ssc@honeywell.com
or
(TAC)
hfs-tac-
support@honeywell.com